Home

GridLink Configuration Software for the GridBoss System User Manual

1. Figure 1 4 Start Copy Disk 7 Remove the GRIDLINK installation disk from the floppy disk drive and insert the new disk Rev 9 99 in the floppy disk drive as instructed by the dialog box shown in Figure 1 5 GRIDLINK User Manual Copy Disk O Insert the disk you want to copy to destination disk and then click OK i Cancel Figure 1 5 Enter New Disk 8 Click OK 9 Click Close Refer to Figure 1 4 on page 1 17 10 Remove the backup copy of the GRIDLINK installation disk 11 Place the original GRIDLINK installation disk in a safe place and use the new backup disk for installations NOTICE The GRIDLINK software is licensed for the use of the original owner on one computer only Fisher Controls authorizes the owner to make a copy of the software for the sole purpose of protecting the disk files from loss or damage Only one copy of the GRIDLINK software may be loaded Store the backup original disk in a dust free dry cool location Avoid storing disks near sources of heat moisture or magnetic fields including electrical devices such as a telephone that produce magnetic fields 1 6 3 Software Installation Procedure Using DOS This section details first time installation of the GRIDLINK software If you already have a previous version of GRIDLINK installed refer to Section 1 6 6 Upgrade Procedure on page 1 22 To install the GRIDLINK software on a personal computer perform the f
2. None No Active Alarms Output Monitor Fail Output Feedback exceeds Output Deviation Deadband for Control Output DR Low Battery Low battery alarm DR Outlet Press Fail Outlet Pressure transmitter point failure Ambient Temp Fail Temperature transmitter point failure Alarm Options Refer to page 3 8 T O Definitions Refer to page 3 8 Tuning Refer to page 3 10 Adaptive Refer to page 3 13 After configuring a DR and pressing F8 Save use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display This saves the configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 Rev 9 99 3 7 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 2 1 RBX Alarm Options The output deviation at the DR can be tracked by the Host by sending a Report by Exception alarm to the Host when an Output Monitor Fail alarm occurs or clears The Output Feedback and the actual output sent must be within the Output Deviation Deadband or an Output Monitor Fail alarm occurs which triggers the RBX Alarm m RBX Alarm Options RBX on Output Deviation Disabled On Alarm Set amp Clear Figure 3 4 Alarm Options RBX on Output Deviation Function to carry out when a deviation in the expected output occurs Disabled Select Disabled to turn this option OFF On Alarm Set When the DR Output Monitor enters an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by E
3. Start the File Manager Select the A drive or the appropriate floppy drive letter Nn nf WwW WN Create a backup copy of your GRIDLINK installation disk as explained previously Double click the Install exe file The screen shown in Figure 1 6 appears Type in a new Target Directory if you want to install the software in a directory other than the default C GRIDLINK The GRIDLINK default directory is recommended Press the Install pushbutton Note that the Cancel pushbutton cannot be used after the installation utility begins When installation is complete the screen displayed in Figure 1 7 appears 8 9 10 11 Press Enter to return to close the DOS install window Remove the GRIDLINK floppy disk Log on to GRIDLINK Refer to Section 1 8 Logging On on page 1 28 Perform a Cold Start using the Restore config and clear history parameter Refer to Section 9 NOTE If you installed GRIDLINK in another directory other than the default GRIDLINK directory you must edit the GRIDLINK PIF file to indicate in which directory GRIDLINK resides Refer to Editing the GRIDLINK PIF in Windows 3 1x on page 1 22 or Editing the GRIDLINK PIF in Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT on page 1 23 1 20 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 6 5 Software Installation Procedure Using Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT This section details first time installation of the GRIDLINK software If you alr
4. 10 6 This page is intentionally left blank Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual APPENDIX A TIMED DURATION OUTPUT A 1 INTRODUCTION This appendix is intended to assist you in the setup configuration and operation of a Discrete Output point see configuration screen in Figure A 1 using the TDO Timed Duration Output function This appendix contains the following sections Information Section Page Number Introduction A l A 1 Enabling The TDO Function A 2 A Defining The Output Pulse A 2 1 A DO Modes A 2 5 A imed Duration TDO A 2 5 1 A 4 oggled A 2 5 2 A 4 DO Toggle A 2 5 3 A 4 cle Time TDO Toggle Onl A 2 6 A 4 System Help Point Humber A 4 Tag po DefFlt 1 Status OM 5 Homentary DEE T ra Time Un 3 Secs Enabled_ i uration Disabled Active Alarm Hone TOO Farane ter sg fidvanced Features Ea Prey F3 Nex ty ES Cops FS Pas teg Fs Cancela State of output OFF open circuit ON closed contacts in Lime CHI Figure A 1 Discrete Output Dialog Rev 9 99 A 1 GRIDLINK User Manual A 2 ENABLING THE TDO FUNCTION The TDO function is enabled through GRIDLINK by selecting DO from the I O menu Refer to Figure A 1 Select Timed Duration TDO in the DOUT Type field In the TDO mode parameters for the engineering unit EU conversion are activated A 2 1 Defining The Output Pulse In the Discrete Outputs dialog press the TDO Parameters pushbutton Refer to F
5. The PC Baud Rate entered is the baud rate set in the PC and is used by GRIDLINK to communicate with the GridBoss through a serial port COM Port on the PC either locally or remotely For successful communications the PC Baud Rate setup in the GridBoss by GRIDLINK and the Baud Rate set in the PC using the Control Panel must match The default value is 9600 Baud Rate If you are having difficulties communicating to your GridBoss set both the PC Baud Rate in GRIDLINK and your serial port COM Port on the Personal Computer to 9600 Baud Rate Your computer s serial port COM Port Baud Rate can be altered from the computer s Control Panel Once you have altered the PC Baud Rate in GRIDLINK press F8 Save Restart the Personal Computer Press Connect to establish a connection If you are using a remote PC running GRIDLINK to communicate to a GridBoss through a COM port check the Baud Rate of the port by using the System Comm Ports function described in Configuring Communications Ports in Section 9 GridBoss Address and Group The GridBoss Group is the Group with which the GridBoss is associated The GridBoss Address is the Address of the specific GridBoss within the Group with which you desire to communicate If you are connected to a multi drop series of GridBoss units either DRs or LPPs enter the exact and unique Address and Group of that specific GridBoss to talk to that device or use the default values of 240 Refer to the System Infor
6. This is the actual amount of time the GridBoss firmware waits between retries when attempting to communicate through a Comm Port with a District Regulator Controller The default time out is 15 seconds but this can be increased if you are having difficulties communicating with your District Regulator The communications port requires at least a 0 25 second timeout The minimum DR Retry Time is 1 second Do not enter 0 zero in the DR Retry Time field DR Retry Count This parameter default is 3 can be set to control the number of times after the initial try that the GridBoss firmware attempts to establish communications with the specified DR before reporting a timeout error The amount of time between retries can be adjusted by using the DR Retry Time parameter Adjust the DR Retry Count value up if you are having trouble communicating with your DR After the DR Retry Count has been exhausted the LPP generates the DR communications failure alarm and waits for the Error Time Delay to expire before trying to communicate with that DR again Number of Completed Calls Number of valid communications between the DR and the LPP The default value is 0 Last DR Comm Time Displays the last date and time the Low Pressure Point Controller had communications with the currently selected District Regulator DR Communication Status Displays the status of the last communications between the District Regulator and the Low Pressure Point Co
7. Accum d Pulses This is the value of the raw counts accumulated pulses as stored in an accumulated value counter that resides in the firmware For each Scan Period the GridBoss determines the number of raw counts that have occurred since the last Scan Period and adds them to the accumulated value counter The accumulated value rolls over to zero after reaching 16 000 000 for a GridBoss The default value is 0 Pulses Today This value accumulates raw pulses until Force End of Day or Contract Hour then it zeros and starts over The default value is 0 Today s Total This field reflects the total EUs accumulated since the most recent Contract Hour Today s Total is reset to zero at Contract Hour The default value is 0 Yesterday s Total This field reflects the total EUs accumulated during the most recent 24 hour period prior to the Contract Hour Yesterday s Total is the previous day s total at Contract Hour The default value is 0 Current Rate This is the value of the calculated rate as of the most recent scan expressed in EUs per unit of time Time units are the same as selected by the Rate Period parameter The Current Rate stores the calculated rate of the pulses which is determined by using the Conversion the Rate Period the Scan Period and the accumulated pulses The Conversion parameter is interpreted as a pulse weight multiplier in terms of pulses EU or in terms of EUs pulse The Rate Period can be one o
8. Rev 9 99 9 9 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 5 COMM PORTS Select System from the menu bar and choose Comm Ports A screen appears similar to that shown either in Figure 9 7 Each communications port has a unique screen with a set of parameters Use the F2 Prev and the F3 Next pushbuttons to page between screens The GridBoss Comm Ports screen is used to set up communications ports available for the GridBoss and not the personal computer PC PC communication ports are set up using the GridBoss Directory function in Section 2 The communication ports located on the GridBoss provide a data link to the GRIDLINK software other GridBoss units and Host systems The following types of communications are possible ElA232 serial communications EIA422 party line serial communications EIA485 multi point serial communications Radio modem communication Leased line modem communications o o Dial up modem communications The communication ports of the GridBoss provide a link to computers such as one running the GRIDLINK software or a Host computer The LOI port labeled Local Port on the screen is standard on every GridBoss and displays when you first select Comm Ports from the System menu Press F3 Next to display the first Host port The Host port COM1 requires activation by the installation of an optional plug in communications card COM2 COM3 and COMA are used to define the communications port used by the PC Therefore if
9. You can turn the associated FST ON or OFF by setting this pushbutton and pressing F8 Save Register 1 to 10 Ten floating point registers are used for global storage for the FST The global Registers can store calculated or manually entered values and can pass data from one table to another These Registers may be read from or written to by any FST and are referred to as Register 1 to Register 10 F1 Update Requests the most recent values from the GridBoss to update the current display F2 Prev Displays the previous FST Parameters screen F3 Next Displays the next FST Parameters screen F4 Copy Copies the values of the current display F5 Paste Places the values of the copied display into the current display F6 Cancel Cancels all actions since the last save and closes the currently selected display screen F8 Save Saves the configuration values in the current display to the GridBoss Rev 9 99 5 3 GRIDLINK User Manual 5 2 2 FST Advanced Features When you use Advanced Features pushbutton in the FST Parameters screen shown in Figure 5 1 a dialog box appears with a number of additional parameters that can be viewed or configured in the FST Register point Refer to Figure 3 2 Advanced Features Timer 1 0 Exec Delay Timer 2 2 O Result Reg Timer 3 3 0 Compare Flag Timer 4 4 0 Mesg 1 Mesg 2 Code Size 0 Bytes Code Pointer Byte 0 Figure 5 2 FST Advanced
10. then your Operator ID and Password must also be valid for the unit For example if you activate the Direct Connect command which uses the local port and security is enabled for the local operator interface LOI port your Operator ID and Password must be found in the Security list before you are allowed to connect to the GridBoss to access the complete menu bar Refer to the Security function in Section 8 NOTE You can only run one version of GRIDLINK at a time GRIDLINK does not support multiple copies of GRIDLINK running on the same computer at the same time Rev 9 99 1 29 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 9 CONNECTING THE COMPUTER TO THE GRIDBOSS The computer running the GRIDLINK software physically connects to the GridBoss through a cable For a local connection this cable is typically a prefabricated operator interface cable available from Fisher Controls One end of the cable a 9 pin D shell female connector plugs into a serial communications port on the computer running the GRIDLINK software The other end of the cable plugs into the GridBoss operator interface connector This connector is a round screw cap protected connector located on the bottom of the GridBoss enclosure Alternately a null modem style cable can be connected to the LOI Local Operator Interface terminals on the GridBoss A null modem cable links the GridBoss to the computer in place of a modem connection It is very important that the pin out for the null
11. 5 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Radio Power Status Read Only Indicates the current status of the Power Control function of ON OFF or RBX Active Zone Indicates which zone is currently activated for determining the Start Time On Time and Off Time The default value is 1 Seconds Minutes Two modes of Power Control are possible Seconds and Minutes Press the pushbutton to switch between Seconds and Minutes In Seconds mode the time base for the timers is in 0 1 second increments primarily used with radios In Minutes mode the time base for the timers is in one minute increments primarily used with cellular telephones The default value is seconds Radio Power Control These options let you activate or deactivate the Radio Power Control function and set the time configuration The following options are available Enabled Seconds Select Enabled Seconds to have Radio Power Control calculated in seconds In Seconds mode the time base for the timers is in 100 millisecond 0 1 second increments and is primarily used with radios Enabled Minutes Select Enabled Minutes to have Radio Power Control calculated in minutes In Minutes mode the time base for the timers is in 1 minute increments and is primarily used with cellular telephones Disabled Select Disabled to deactivate Radio Power Control Start Time Time in hours and minutes HHMM that the respective zone begins Time is expr
12. After configuring a point press F8 Save and use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display to save I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 4 4 1 DI Alarms When you use the Alarms pushbutton in the Discrete Inputs screen shown in Figure 4 13 a dialog box appears that lets you configure the alarms for this Discrete Input If alarms occur an alarm event is written to the Alarm Log For all discrete inputs you can configure RBX Alarming and view Active Alarms RBK Alarming Disabled On Alarm On Alarm On Alarm Figure 4 14 Discrete Input Alarms Rev 9 99 4 17 GRIDLINK User Manual RBX Alarming RBX Alarming allows you to send a Report by Exception alarm to the Host when the point alarm condition is met Refer to Section 9 Configuring Report by Exception Disabled Select Disabled to turn RBX Alarming OFF On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Set amp Clear In either condition an RBX message generates Note that RBX Alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured 4 4 2 DI Advanced Features When you use the Advanced Features pushbutton in the Discrete Inputs scr
13. Alainen en nea 4 29 MODIOT es cocosocicicionsi co cishad eteoror eerte ete iore etes 6 18 PIN it 7 5 Point Number oooooonnonononoccnononononocococononnnnnnananannnonono 4 25 Pulse Input siii hte cceeiboties rice 4 25 Pulses Toda ice 4 27 Pulse EU ia 4 31 Rate Max Rollover ooccconcccncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnn 4 30 Rate Period oooooooooooocncnnnnnnnncnononononocnnononononanannnnnnns 4 31 Running Total Entered Rollover 4 30 Scar Periode AAA A 4 26 S CAMMING vi orci A ee et et daela 4 27 IS 4 26 Today s Total eneore eeann eoe Eann eoon 4 27 Today s Total Max Rollover oooooconoccccnonccccnonncono 4 30 UMS E E A EA EN E EE dto 4 26 Yesterday s Total coooooonnococnnnnococnnoocccconcncnnnnnconnnnnos 4 27 A OE OE E A NEE E A S G 4 PIREdiHOT AE E E A E O EEN 1 22 1 23 A E E EE AO 1 30 AE ereen eseese teare se T ienis 8 6 ILOT TEER E he o EEE ETE G 4 Point DefinitiON ccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnons 5 13 Point Number occoccccnncnnnnnnnnnoneninnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnns 4 2 G 4 Point Types Defined ias ado AGHA Aisa 7 5 Pointing DEVICES ino 1 8 POp Up Id WS isc roic id rie a tie 1 13 Ports Operator Interface LOI ooooonoocccnnoncconononcncnnnnnnno 1 30 PostScnpt s3 c chsidoniinn detent Aas 2 30 IAN ae e oet eti eresian 5 10 l 9 GRIDLINK User Manual PREDCE ea E Oo 7 5 Predicted Adaptive Value ooncnnnccnnoninocccconconanccnnnnnos 3 14 Pressure XMit ooooooonnnn
14. High Reading EU Low EU Low Reading EU Filtered EUs Filter Alarm Alarm o o File Grid TO Date Display Wistoru Utilities System H Analog Inputs Point Tag 3 1 0 Hi El 153 17 Low El W3 1 6 5 Filtered Ells 43 1 3 Alarm 43 1 16 Character Sat A BEDE F amp A SE LAO OOD OP ESTUVO HO amp Y Z ft t amp p ep tert oe I Prou Soi Hent E y cancel 5 ne co os Figure 6 16 Displaying Live Data Rev 9 99 6 9 GRIDLINK User Manual 6 2 2 2 Copying Display Data It is usually quicker to copy data within a custom display than to re create the work 1 Place your cursor at the top left corner of the words Analog Inputs 2 Click and drag your cursor to the bottom of the last live output value in the Alarm live value field Refer to Figure 6 17 File Grid LO Data Display History Utilities System Help Analog inputs e a ae Gua is a TOR SeTUWeURY 1BCOoOEF G HOIAEK Se E Poet Rr 4 Llop q tS F I 1 a Preu Seii Hont Sa Y Caner a 5 Rn a a da Laas ty Cine CT Figure 6 17 Copying Custom Display Data 3 Press the Copy pushbutton 6 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 Place your cursor to the right of the current values and press Paste Refer to Figure 6 18 File Grid 10 Date Display History Utilities Analog Inputs Analog Inputs Sues bom Help Point Tag H3 1 B Point Ta a3 i Hi EU Ha 1 7 Hi El a i 1 L
15. On Alarm Set Clear ccccnnnnnnnn 3 4 3 8 3 20 4 5 E E aes 4 14 4 18 4 29 9 19 ON ENT E Aa 7 5 On Counter nasal 5 10 On Linera celda ido Meade aso iciios 5 8 5 9 ONCTR ua 7 5 On line s ar estes ae ete ee G 3 ON ina 2 3 OP ias G 3 Opcode nissan 5 11 G 4 Opcode Setup rmn en ri 5 11 Open sisi 2 12 Open Filet stack aisle i sid eed ees 2 13 Operator nia ii inti hei iain 7 8 Operator ID ine a 1 28 8 2 8 4 Detalla eed hens 1 28 8 1 Operator Interface POlt ooooonnnnninccnoncnonccnnnonccnonnconnnos 1 30 Outer Loop Mode inenen in aea 3 6 Outer Loop Tuning secccnioorirsioconjonciane coo ccees ieee 3 17 Outlet Press Point Fail High Limit 3 12 3 23 Outlet Press Point Fail Low Limit 3 12 3 23 Outlet PresSUTE ooooonnncnnnnnnnnnonnnonocncnnnnnonnnnnnnns 3 5 3 10 OU PUE E E E E EE E de 3 10 ANAO ii a eet ae 4 11 Output Deviation Deadband ooonnccnnccnonccnonnnoncc nannss 3 12 Output Feedback oooccnnncccnonnnncccnonncnnnonanccnnnos 3 6 3 10 Output Feedback POiNt ooooononccnnccconcnonccnnnanccnonacinnnos 3 10 Output Monitor Fail oononccnnoninccnoncccnnncononncnonccnnnccnnne 3 7 QUEPU Ype eee eea e ere aE aeae Sed EEDE aE EEEE eis 3 5 QUTVAE POSEE lidad E E E 7 5 Overview of User Interface oooonnnnnnnonononocccnncnocononononono 1 7 P Q Page DOWD siosio ties erento E eE E SETE EEEE a ERa 1 14 Pape UD aniston do oso ado ica E E id 1 14 A vna ssh cb e Se eE ws
16. Parameter such as EU for the Filtered Engineering Units Parameter Refer to Figure 5 9 concerning the point definition 5 12 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 5 6 USER LIST SETUP Select Data from the menu bar and then choose User List Setup A screen appears that lets you assign up to 16 parameters for viewing on the GridBoss front panel display which shows each parameter for two or three seconds before continuing on to the next one in the sequence Refer to Figure 5 8 The built in Liquid Crystal Display LCD in the GridBoss provides the ability to look at data and configuration parameters while on site without using the local operator interface LOD and a personal computer PC The LCD display is factory mounted directly to the Main Electronics Board and visible through the window on the front panel Through this display you can view pre determined information stored in the GridBoss Fil l S E i fea TET Att Li List Number dl Tit jeer ata Y inate quan jon pescriotio Data m Cu 1 ETA J Alel fra Data 410 Deliei J Data 83 APC aT LU Line lemp Data 411 Deef ioe l boe Data 6 Dic A 1 CATAL pida lata 412 Undefined 2 Data 5 aiii lata 413 Undefined y Data Undefined il Data 14 Undefined 1 E Data 87 Undefinad A L Data 15 Undefined J L Data El Undefined PE Data 116 Add l doi Te ee le y l Figure 5 8 LCD User List Point Definition Press the Point Definition pushbuttons to de
17. Preu Soi Hant zai Eance 5 Hes Bc paa Paste we L Tue y Cancel J Chore ter Se y si Figure 6 1 GridBoss Display Use New Display to create a new GridBoss display Use the key to enter a field representing live data GridBoss displays can be created on or off line and saved to a disk file The pushbuttons available at the bottom of the screen are New Use this pushbutton to create a new display CAUTION This pushbutton clears whatever display is currently on the screen so be sure you have saved a display you want to keep before using this pushbutton Copy Use this pushbutton to copy a highlighted block of characters and fields within the display builder and to place the contents on the clipboard Highlight by dragging the mouse over the desired area Cut Use this pushbutton to delete a highlighted block of characters and fields within the display builder and place the contents on the clipboard Highlight by dragging the mouse over the desired area Paste Place the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor and clear the clipboard The cursor locates where the upper left corner of a block will be placed Save Save the current display to a disk file This stores a copy of the display to a file located on the computer Use the extension DSP display when you save the disk file Refer to Figure 6 13 6 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Cancel Cancel all actions since the la
18. Stop Recording Exit Comm with LPP Regulator Control Holiday Dates Comm with DRs Low Pressure Control Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Pulse Inputs FST Register Editor Soft Points Radio Control Opcode Setup User List Setup Display New Display Display on Disk Monitor Discrete Input Discrete Output Analog Input Analog Output Pulse Input Control Loop History Setup Min Max Minute 15 Minute Day Events Alarms Utilities Security GridLink Operator GridBoss Logon Macros Record Macro Play Macro Stop Recording GridBoss Memory Calibration Values System Clock Information Flags Comm Ports Help Getting Started Keys Help Contents About Initial File menu only Not included on initial File menu DR Units Only LPP Units Only 5 1 0 Card Only Figure 1 2 Menu Tree for the GRIDLINK Software 1 5 5 Dialog Boxes Dialog boxes are pop up windows that appear during tasks such as configuration and creating custom displays Most appear when a pushbutton is pressed in a function screen Dialog boxes provide additional information and to assist in making selections Dialog boxes typically have a thick line border such as the Data title bar A dialog box overlays part of the screen area of the display The dialog box can be moved with a mouse by dragging its top border Note that data in the screen behind the dialog box can be changed even with the d
19. The DR shifts from Adaptive or Outer Loop Mode to Inner Loop control Mode The default value is 100 Active Alarms This field indicates any alarms that are active for this point LPP alarms are not saved to the Alarm Log unless the actual I O point type has Alarming Enabled Alarms include None No Active Alarms Low Battery Low battery alarm Pressure Point Fail Pressure transmitter point failure After configuring a LPP and pressing F8 Save use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display This saves the configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 Rev 9 99 3 23 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 24 This page intentionally left blank Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 4 THE l O MENU 4 1 SCOPE This section describes how to configure a GridBoss for reading inputs and supplying outputs In general the input and output configurations described in this section should be completed before the application s functionality such as a PID point or an FST is configured The I O menu is accessed by selecting the I O option in the GRIDLINK menu bar This option provides access to configurable I O parameters within the GridBoss Input and output parameters are configured by points using options in the I O menu Each input and output has a unique Point Number to identify the input or output Each I O point must be individually configur
20. and alarm logged data The GRIDLINK software is designed for ease of use Pull down menus simplify accessing the functions provided by the software and dialog boxes help to direct selections and data entry Actions can be performed with the keyboard or a pointing device such as a mouse Refer to Section 1 5 for a description of the user interface Help screens are accessed either from the Help menu or in a context sensitive fashion from within the menus and screens This feature makes it easy to access on line information for any GRIDLINK topic 1 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual You can build custom displays for the GridBoss units that combine both graphic and dynamic data elements Using GRIDLINK the displays can monitor the operation of a GridBoss unit either locally or remotely GRIDLINK lets you record custom keystroke sequences called macros which can play back dozens of keystrokes at a time The software also provides multiple levels of security for controlling access to GRIDLINK functions as well as the GridBoss databases Making changes to passwords or to the access level for personnel is accomplished through the Security menu which is available only to an authorized person 1 4 2 GridBoss System Controllers The GridBoss System uses GB600 Series Controllers which are pressure measurement computers that automate the delivery of natural gas at an optimized and adequate pressure for natural gas distribution systems
21. ccooocccnocnonnconoccnonanononcnonccnonacnonacinnaconos 3 6 Rev 9 99 Input Output MOD oia TT E G 3 Install PrograM ooooooncconcninncccnnnnnns 1 18 1 20 1 21 1 22 Inte ger Flag usnis nnana aan 5 6 Tit gral iieri nonen aTa aT EEEE 3 17 Integral Gaia dl eta 3 11 Intellution ForMat oooooocnnonncnnoncconononcnnnnncnnnnnnnnncinnnnno 2 28 eta nitrilo iris 1 7 INTEL ici idas 7 5 VENA ER E E 7 13 RO a e a a a Ra i 2 7 K Kbs dis G 3 Key Off D lay ic i cients e TAK Eaa N ETEK ea 9 11 K y On Del Visit earns riseire 9 11 Key Usage a GA i eE ET 10 3 Keyboatd snie n a E 1 8 1 9 Keys Commonly Used oooococcccncccnoncconnncnonncnonccnnno 1 10 Specific FUNC IONS cccooccconccnnncnnnnnncnonccnonacnonacinnnos 1 14 Keyoff Delay iconos airis 2 8 KA Zest hia ee a ini as iain G 3 Kax el iia iaa 1 5 G 3 L Last DR Comm TiMO oooococcnnonccnnnoncnonononcnnnonancnoninnncnos 3 18 Last DR Control Mode ccoooococcnnoncccnnonncononcnononnnccnnnos 3 19 Last DR PID Calc StatUS cccooooocconcccononccnnocononcnnnnnns 3 19 Last LPP Comm Time ooooooccccnonononcnoncnnnonncnnnonnnnnnananon no 3 3 Last LPP Press Valu csssscsscsteiscinscsetearanens 3 3 Last Setpoint Change ooooccconcconccconanonanonnnonnnonnnos 3 3 3 19 Latched 3 cave a a a Ea 4 16 4 21 Launching GRIDLINK o e 1 27 1 28 LED iis mas G 3 LCD Display Configuration User Distancias earr E 5 13 SI A reise nets sede EEEE Eees 5 13 LED ii Se eo Ae as G 3 Lie Vel E E
22. copy the disk and keep the original installation disk as a backup This ensures that you have an uncorrupted copy of all the files One way to copy the original installation disk is to use the DOS command called DISKCOPY You must have the original GRIDLINK installation disk and an extra disk of the same storage capacity to perform the following procedure 1 Atthe DOS prompt type diskcopy A A and press Enter to copy the original GRIDLINK installation disk to the second disk Place the source disk GRIDLINK disk into your floppy disk drive and press Enter Remove the source disk and place the second disk in drive A when the prompt appears Press OK Remove the backup copy of the GRIDLINK installation disk Place the original GRIDLINK installation disk in a safe place and use the new backup disk for installations Nn BW WN 1 6 2 2 Copying a Disk Using Windows 3 1x As a precaution copy the disk and keep the original installation disk as a backup This ensures that you have an uncorrupted copy of all the files You must have the original GRIDLINK installation disk and an extra disk of the same storage capacity to perform the following procedure 1 Start the File Manager 2 Select the A drive or the appropriate floppy drive letter 3 Select Copy Disk from the File Manager s Disk menu 4 Click Yes when asked This operation will erase ALL data from the destination disk Are you sure you want to continue 5
23. including Getting Started Keys Help Contents and About A ppendix A Timed Duration Output provides information detailing how to accurately define set up and use the various types of Timed Duration Outputs TDOs Defines terms used in Fisher Control s documentation Lists alphabetically the items contained in this manual including the section and page number NOTE In most cases the GB602 LPP and GB601 DR controllers either of which may be referred to as a GridBoss are identical in operation The descriptions and procedures in all sections apply to both controllers except where otherwise noted 4 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 2 SECTION 1 GETTING STARTED CONTENTS This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number Organization ser Manual Overview nterface Overview enu Bar and Menus eyboard and Pointing Devices sing the Keyboard sing the Mouse unction Screens Dialog Boxes elp System Software Disk Software Installation Procedure Using DOS Software Installation Procedure Using Windows 3 1x Adjusting Screen Colors for Monochrome Displays Rev 9 99 1 3 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The physical aspects of the GridBoss units are contained in their respective instruction manuals The following manuals include information not found in this manual amp GridBoss Instruction Manual Form A6075 Part Number D30113
24. parameter or logical number For example for an Analog Output point type you might select AO B 1 Finally in the right most scrollable list choose the specific parameter to use For an Analog Input this would typically be Filtered EUs Outlet Pressure Point type used by the Outlet Pressure process variable The default value is Analog Input Point Number A2 Temperature Point type used by the RTD to acquire the ambient Temperature The default value is Analog Input Point Number A3 Output Point type used by the Control Output when using an Analog Output The default value is Analog Output Point Number B1 DO Open Point Point type used by the Control Output to open the output when using a Discrete Output DO Close Point Point type used by the Control Output to close the output when using a Discrete Output Output Feedback Select Enabled to allow the Kixcel I P or servo valve to send the exact location of the Kixcel back to the District Regulator when using an Analog Input AD Output Feedback Point Point type used by the AI Output Feedback Point if Output Feedback is Enabled The default value is Analog Input Point Number B2 3 2 3 Tuning The Inner Loop control PID is configured using the Tuning screen Tuning Propor tional Gain H ans Default Setpoint 1 Integral Gain l Hinimua Setpoint Derivativa Gain 0 Maximum Setpoint LE Scale Factor 1 Default Output Error Deadband A 1000080 Min
25. point values polled or received as accumulated values This accumulation technique is used to acquire accurate accumulated counts from an input for a specified time period Totalization assumes that the value being archived is zeroed out by something else at Contract Hour and that no rollover of the value occurs Totalization occurs at the Minute Historical Log and is summed up for the 15 Minute and Daily Historical Logs A minute after Contract Hour the current value is archived All other minutes will be the difference between the current value and the previous minute s archived value FST Time Min This allows the FST to archive the time it placed a value in another history point The Function Sequence Table controlled time stamp is stored as Day Month Hour Minute FST Time Sec This allows the FST to archive the time it placed a value in another history point The Function Sequence Table controlled time stamp is stored as Day Hour Minute Second FST Data This allows the FST to archive a value to a historical archive Function Sequence Table controls archiving of data to a history point based on criteria you establish The FST must be written to write to the appropriate index in the historical archive Select Accumulation Time Basis When the Select Archive Type parameter is set to Accumulate this list appears at the bottom of the screen Choose one of the following options to determine how the accumulated values are
26. 1 10 4 1 Adjusting Screen Colors for Monochrome Displays To adjust the GRIDLINK screen colors to display correctly on a monochrome display 1 Double click the GRIDLINK INI file located in the directory where you installed GRIDLINK 2 Open the GRIDLINK INI file using Notepad or another text editor 3 Copy the following text into the Color schemes section of the GRIDLINK INI file COLORI1 07 07 07 COLOR2 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 0F COLOR3 OF 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 COLOR4 0 07 70 00 00 OF OF OF COLORS OF 70 70 70 70 8F 8F 70 COLOR6 0 70 70 70 70 10 70 07 COLOR7 07 70 00 00 00 10 70 07 COLOR8 07 70 00 00 00 10 70 07 COLORY 07 70 00 00 00 70 70 7F COLORI1 TE 70 70 COLORI1 TE 70 70 COLORI1 TE 70 70 COLORI1 70 09 01 Rev 9 99 F 70 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 70 00 1 00 00 00 70 00 2 00 00 00 70 00 3 01 00 00 00 00 Root window Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default window status window help list box help push btn help window pushbutton radiobutton checkbox string entry field 1 35 GRIDLINK User Manual COLOR14 70 09 01 01 00 00 00 00 COLOR15 1F 70 70
27. 1 21 5 During the procedure specify the same directory typically GRIDLINK for installation where GRIDLINK is currently installed After it begins the installation utility warns you that GRIDLINK EXE already exists and asks you if you want to overwrite the file Type a to replace all existing files 6 If you copied DIR files in Step 2 copy them back into the GRIDLINK directory or whatever directory you are using for the GRIDLINK software They should replace any DIR files that were just installed 7 Restore the backup configuration file using the Disk Config to GridBoss option detailed in Section 2 1 6 7 Editing the GRIDLINK PIF in Windows 3 1x If you installed GRIDLINK in another directory other than the default GRIDLINK directory you must edit the GRIDLINK PIF file to indicate in which directory GRIDLINK resides 1 Select the Main program group window 2 Double click the PIF Editor icon PIF Editor 1 22 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 Select Open from the File menu 4 Navigate to the GRIDLINK pif file located in the Target Directory in which you installed GRIDLINK and click OK 5 Enter the directory path where you installed GRIDLINK in the Program Filename field and GRIDLINK EXE after the directory path For example if you installed GRIDLINK in the C Fisher directory enter C Fisher GRIDLINK EXE in the Program Filename field Refer to Figure 1 8 PIF Editor GRIDLINK PIF File
28. 10 Minimum Setpoint The Minimum Setpoint to which the Outer Loop can change the Setpoint The default value is 8 Maximum Setpoint The Maximum Setpoint to which the Outer Loop can change the Setpoint The default value is 15 Default Output The Inner Loop s default Kixcel position entry If the DR has a low battery alarm or the Outlet Pressure transducer produces an equipment failure alarm the control loop shifts to Manual Mode and the Kixcel moves to the Default Output position The default value is 10 Rev 9 99 3 11 GRIDLINK User Manual Minimum Output The minimum Control Output to which the Inner Loop s calculated output can fall The default value is 8 Maximum Output The maximum Control Output to which the Inner Loop s calculated output can not exceed The default value is 15 Manual Tracking When the control Mode is shifted from Manual to Inner Loop Outer Loop or Adaptive Mode the Manual Tracking can change the Inner Loop Setpoint If Manual Tracking 1s enabled when shifting out of Manual Mode the Inner Loop Setpoint changes to the current Outlet Pressure This avoids an inadvertent bump in pressure If Manual Tracking is disabled when shifting out of Manual Mode the Inner Loop Setpoint remains unchanged Halt PID on Reset Select Enabled to stop PID control actions when the GridBoss is reset Values remain at their last known value Low Battery Voltage Limit The lowest voltage
29. 4 7 Calibration Values cccssscccceeseceeeseceeeeeeessreeesaes 8 9 O 7 5 A A N A EA 2 29 A E A A E ad 1 11 CENTR Y roren neee aee ie dla 7 5 1 2 Change Data Verification ooncocconccnnnononcncnonccnnanccnnnoss 6 8 Change in Outputiss ssiscisssccesestestics ainia crios 3 6 Changing Display Data ooooccnoncnonccnoncnonncononcnonanccnnne 6 11 Character Set cocci ccccccciacccedascecoasaceacsocvacacesooseccacgeossnccvase 6 3 Check in Time for DRS ocooooncccncncncnnnonininncccncnnnono 3 22 CHAGOUT cuenca dede leido teks 7 5 CHESPatt tooo dintel rc a tet cd 7 5 Clear Internal Configuration Memory ccoocccnoccnoncncnancnno 9 8 Clear Profiles oooooonoooocrnccnnenanoooorocnononanononiocronons 3 13 Ch ppm E ae a E T laios 4 7 CLK Real time Clock ooooonccnncnncnnninonnnoccnocicnnnnnns 7 5 Clock Checking and Setting oooooccooccconccconnnonancnnnninanccnnne 9 2 Code Pointer ida 5 5 COde SiZ6 iit CR i a Be 5 5 Cold Start 2s BEE i ee BR N 9 8 Collect GridBoss Datas enisi nnr Ta 2 14 Events A lasno nn a Ea 2 19 A n a R Sa 2 19 CS ds 1 33 Adjusting Screen eeeeeseceeseeceseneesneeeseeseeeeee 1 33 COM Communications Ports oooncccccnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnns 7 5 COM ed he ee et G 1 Comm Board id 9 11 Comm Fail oocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononinininininininonss 2 3 2 7 3 3 Comm LISt occcccnnnnnnnncccnnnnnnnnonaniocincnnnononanicnicccnnnnnnnnn 2 5 Comm Port for DRS ooonnnnnnnnnn
30. 9 13 9 5 1 Modem When using a dial up modem to communicate to a Host through the communications port press the Modem pushbutton in the GridBoss Comm Ports screen Press F3 Next to view COM1 if the Modem button is not present on the first LOI screen A dialog box displays as shown in Figure 9 8 Modem_Type Config Command ATEDHOVOA1008C18D08 S08L 0S0 157 608410 Hone Connect Command ATDT lt number gt External Connect Time 15 Internal Disconnect Time Inactivity Time Modem Status OK Figure 9 8 Modem Configuration Modem Type Choose None for a serial link to the Host External for a modem that is external to the GridBoss or Internal for the GridBoss modem communications card For a GridBoss an internal card will be automatically recognized and the Baud Rate automatically set to 2400 Config Command Type in the characters required to initialize the modem Refer to the manufacturer s literature For an internal modem use the default value or the modem card may not work The default Config Command modem string is ATEOHOVOX100 amp C1 amp D0 amp S0 amp LOSO 1S7 60 amp WO Connect Command Type in the Hayes style command required to contact the Host This is the Host s telephone number Typically this is the command ATDT followed by the telephone number This parameter is required only for dial out operations such as for RBX Alarming Refer to Table 9 1 Connect Command ATDT 18005151212 wher
31. At the Insert Source Disk dialog insert the master GRIDLINK disk into your floppy disk drive and click OK 6 At the Insert destination disk dialog remove the GRIDLINK installation disk from the floppy disk drive and insert the new disk in the floppy disk drive 7 Click OK 8 Remove the backup copy of the GRIDLINK installation disk 9 Place the original GRIDLINK installation disk in a safe place and use the new backup disk for installations 1 16 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 6 2 3 Copying a Disk Using Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT As a precaution copy the disk and keep the original installation disk as a backup This ensures that you have an uncorrupted copy of all the files You must have the original GRIDLINK installation disk and an extra disk of the same storage capacity to perform the following procedure 1 Double click the My Computer icon on your desktop Highlight the A drive nA A WwW N Insert the master GRIDLINK disk into your floppy disk drive typically the A drive aio i Right mouse click on the A drive icon az Floppy Select Copy Disk Refer to Figure 1 3 A Open Explore Find Scan for Viruses Copy Disk Sharing CH Add to Zip Format Paste Create Shortcut Figure 1 3 Copy Disk 6 Click Start to read the source disk GRIDLINK installation disk see Figure 1 4 Copy from Copy to E 3 Floppy 4 E 3 Floppy 4
32. Features Timer 1 to 4 These four timers when set greater than 0 decrement by 1 every 100 milliseconds When the timer reaches 0 the FST branches to the label specified in the Timer function The Timer values are determined by the FST The sequence of functions is executed at the frequency defined in the Timer parameter fields Misc 1 to 4 Four unsigned integers 8 bit bytes with valid decimal values of 0 to 255 that are used for global storage by the FST Exec Delay The delay between the execution of successive FST commands Result Reg The results register or accumulator The results register is a floating point value that is passed between functions As the sequence of functions executes two memory locations store intermediate results from one function to the next The Results Register RR stores a floating point or analog value sometimes referred to as the signal value analog SVA The other location stores a discrete value called the signal value discrete SVD as the Compare Flag parameter Depending on the function the Results Register and the Compare Flag may be loaded stored tested modified or left unchanged 5 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Compare Flag The Compare Flag is often referred to as the signal value discrete SVD The compare flag is an 8 bit integer representing the numbers 0 through 255 The Results Register stores a floating point or analog value sometimes referred
33. Features on page 4 30 Units A 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the pulse input Examples for a Rate Value MCF day BBL day or gpm Scan Period The amount of time between scans of the EU Value in second intervals The default 4 26 value is 1 second Note that the rate calculation is performed based on the number of pulses counted during the scan interval divided by the time interval To avoid highly fluctuating calculation results there should typically be at least 10 pulses occurring between scans at low flow conditions In addition longer Scan Periods reduce the loading on the processor For example if a flow meter produces one pulse per second at low flow then the Scan Period should be set to a minimum of 10 seconds For a pulse input implemented in a PI module the input signal must be scanned often enough such that rollover in the module s 16 bit counter which occurs at 65535 is not missed For example a 10 kHz input signal must be scanned at least every 6 5 seconds to register the value before rollover occurs Once the Scan Period is reached the Accum d Pulses Pulses Today Today s Total Yesterday s Total and Current Rate values update Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Conversion This value is multiplied by the number of pulses to determine the Units as configured This parameter is sometimes referred to as the meter factor for turbine meters The default value is 1
34. Figure 2 5 Advanced Features Hode Retries 9 GRIDLINK TX Delay 0 09 Secs Address Dialup Keyoff Delay Ol Secs Group 1 Timeout 0 25 Secs Initialize Command Dial Command Hang Up Command Figure 2 5 GridBoss Directory Advanced Features Rev 9 99 2 7 GRIDLINK User Manual Mode Indicates the type of communications being implemented Setting this parameter to Dialup enables sending the initialize dial and hang up commands to an AT command set compatible modem Setting this parameter to Radio bypasses the modem commands and uses normal communications Radio is used for any non modem type communications Retries This parameter default is 5 can be set from 0 to 25 to control the number of times after the initial try that the GRIDLINK software attempts to establish communications with the specified GridBoss before reporting a timeout error The amount of time between retries can be adjusted by using the Timeout parameter Adjust the Retries value up if you are having trouble communicating with your GridBoss TX Delay The TX Delay has a default value of 0 05 seconds The TX Delay enables the RTS line for the amount of configured delay periods before transmitting data The delay periods can be set in 0 050 second increments A delay is typically used to allow a radio or modem to fully enable the transmit mode before data is applied to transmit In direct wire communications this valu
35. GRIDLINK User Manual 1 6 6 Upgrade Procedure This sections details upgrading your GRIDLINK software from a previous version If this is a first time installation refer to Section 1 6 3 Software Installation Procedures starting on page 1 18 If you are updating your firmware or hardware refer to Section 2 Update Firmware or Update Hardware To install a newer version of the GRIDLINK software on a personal computer perform the following steps 1 Create a backup configuration file using the GridBoss Config to Disk option detailed in Section 2 2 Create a backup copy of your GRIDLINK installation disk as explained previously 3 During the installation the DIR files COMM DIR and Defltxx DIR files are placed into the GRIDLINK directory or whatever directory you specify If you specify the same directory as the previous version these files will be written over Therefore if any of these files have been modified but not renamed their changes will be lost unless you either rename them now or copy them to another directory 4 Turn off all FSTs Refer to Function Sequence Table FST User Manual Form A4625 5 Install GRIDLINK using one of the following procedures Section 1 6 3 Software Installation Procedure Using DOS on page 1 18 Section 1 6 4 Software Installation Procedure Using Windows 3 1x on page 1 20 4 Section 1 6 5 Software Installation Procedure Using Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT on page
36. Group numbers available Group 240 Reserved Group 241 247 GRIDLINK Group numbers available 2 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Initialize Command This command initializes the modem to the desired operation parameters A typical command for AT command set modems is shown in the following example Refer to the modem manufacturer s instructions for more information Initialize Command ATXXX where 3 second pause send escape code to modem disconnect and perform software reset xxx depends on the type of modem but some modems use the same command as for hang up AT xxx Dial Command This command provides the modem with a telephone number to dial out This is the telephone number of the GridBoss with which GRIDLINK is trying to communicate A typical command for AT command set modems is shown in the following example Refer to the modem manufacturer s instructions for more information Dial Command ATDT 18005151212 dial the number 1 800 515 1212 tone dialing where ATDx H II NOTE The telephone numbers must include the exact sequence required at the PC In certain cases access numbers such as 9 and area codes 1 212 may be required Hang Up Command This command provides the modem with commands for an orderly disconnect or hang up sequence A typical command for AT command set compatible modems is the same as the initialize command Refer to the modem manufacturer s inst
37. New Open Collect GridBoss Data Download Update Firmware Update Hardware Convert Print Configuration GRIDLINK Security Macros and Exit option Section 3 The Grid Menu describes the options located under the Grid menu including Comm with LPP Regulator Control Holiday Dates Comm with DRs and Low Pressure Control Section 4 The I O Menu provides information detailing options located under the I O menu including AI AO DI DO and PI Section 5 The Data Menu provides information detailing features located in the Data menu including FST Softpoints Radio Control Opcode Setup and User List Setup Section 6 The Display Menu provides information detailing features located in the Display menu including Custom Displays and Monitor options Section 7 The History Menu provides information detailing features located in the History menu including History Setup Min Max History Minute History Hourly History Day History Events History and Alarms History Section 8 The Utilities Menu provides information detailing features located in the Utilities menu including Security Macros GridBoss Memory and Calibration Values Section 9 The System Menu provides information detailing features located in the System menu including Clock Information Flags Comm Ports and configuring RBX Alarming Section 10 The Help Menu provides information detailing features located in the Help menu
38. O menu Refer to Figure A 1 Select Toggled in the DOUT Type field The single pulse output can be triggered by writing to the Status or the EU Value parameter of the DO point This can be accomplished directly by a PID point or by an FST A 2 5 3 TDO Toggle The continuous pulse output TDO Toggle is enabled through the GRIDLINK software by selecting DO from the I O menu Refer to Figure A 1 Select TDO Toggled in the DOUT Type field A continuous pulse is generated with the pulse length being controlled by writing to the Cycle Time parameter in the DO point This can be accomplished directly or by an FST Refer to Cycle Time TDO Toggle Only A 2 6 Cycle Time TDO Toggle Only Cycle Time is defined in the TDO Parameters screen Refer to Figure A 2 The Cycle Time entry is used to define the OFF time in the TDO Toggle mode The OFF time is calculated by the formula Off Time Cycle Time On Time A 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Example A TDO is used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 100 MCF per day flow The output is repeated every 15 seconds TOO Parameters Cycle Time Bs Count 188 Count Low Reading EU High Reading El EU Value Uni ts Percent Figure A 3 TDO Parameters If the Cycle Time is less than or equal to the On Time the OFF time is set to one Care must be taken in configuration includin
39. PRSVAL Average 4 Inner Loop Regulator Output Pressure DRC 1 OUTVAL Average 5 Inner Loop Regulator Output Pressure Monitor DRC 1 MONVAL Average 6 Inner Loop Coefficient of Temperature APC 1 TCOEFF Current Value 7 Inner Loop Adaptive Error APC 1 AERROR Current Value 8 PID Control Output Value Setpoint DRC 1 SETPT Current Value 9 Battery Voltage AINE 1 EU Average At the Low Pressure Point GridBoss the first seven history points are pre configured Refer to Table 7 2 CAUTION Do not alter the pre configured default history points Table 7 2 LPP Default History Points History Definition Point Type Type of Point Archiving 1 Input Pressure LPC 1 LPVAL Average 2 Number of Calls from District Regulator 1 DR 1 Calls Current Value 3 Number of Calls from District Regulator 2 DR 2 Calls Current Value 4 Number of Calls from District Regulator 3 DR 3 Calls Current Value 5 Number of Calls from District Regulator 4 DR 4 Calls Current Value 6 Number of Calls from District Regulator 5 DR 5 Calls Current Value 7 Battery Voltage AINE 1 EU Average History points for the GridBoss are configured using GRIDLINK and are selected in the History Setup screen located in the History menu s Setup option All history points in a GridBoss may be configured as desired All history points are configured using Point Type Logical Number and Parameter Number TLP Rev 9 99 7 3 GRIDLINK Use
40. Ra s 10 2 Help Contents sc icc3 cess ctecces hus svesckus tis cootonis destinos 10 4 Help Menu cieie covsceasces caus ccetebvsins toeseuks covssnesses 10 1 dex Stilo a na iris bado 1 15 Index of Topic uc dolls 10 3 Menu Items etine e tee e a ien eiee E Tasas 10 4 Status Mind 1 15 SNS oiean eaeoe aos a e SEEE Eo Ee Eor 1 14 VSMS KEYS tanos 10 3 Help Menta a da cheat ones 1 14 High Reading EU lanian a a a A 2 Hist e a a t 2 19 2 27 Collect GridBoss Data ooooccnnoccccnoooccccoooncncnonnncnnnno 2 14 History Meni ani a ee lek ee ees 7 1 LI Mit e id 7 10 ALAS AA A eee oe hase 7 15 DIA A ete 7 11 EVE ao ett 7 13 MIMI 7 7 Min tte de ida 7 9 SetU pss cstesissiscssharis iesatastasteasdakt EA ARE 7 1 History POints s tic shsiecieidctasisesstavhceasedegisenystaiae 7 2 9 5 Hold Time nient ea Mieke 5 8 5 10 Host Address and Host Group cooocccoocccnoccconnncnonacinnoss 9 15 HOUR cishi tati cil eaten 7 5 I J VO Br cone G 1 VO Definitions e ia i a cdgsi 3 7 T O Menu y EEE EE bi 4 2 AO E Adh aia iia 4 11 Dl dit 4 15 DO di 4 20 Pi EA 4 25 TEO 1 5 A iisloaigh sas fipieiemetl E G 3 Inactivity Dimes ib lll 9 13 Index of Help TopiCS oooonoccnoccconaccnanononccnnnnccnonacinnnos 1 15 Index Pushutton ooooocooocccccooncncnnonnnnononcnoconancncnnnnnnns 10 3 Information nnn EE 9 3 Additonal s os iccectecdeveceseccsscseecundaadevasccsicar n s 1 4 Initialize Command e sseeseseeeeeseeeesseseeeseessrerssseressrese 2 9 Inner Loop Mode
41. Rev 9 99 4 5 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 2 2 Al Advanced Features When you press the Advanced Features pushbutton in the Analog Inputs screen shown in Figure 4 1 a dialog box appears that lets you configure features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected analog input Refer to Figure 4 3 Advanced Features Filter Temp Compensation Adjusted A D 02 800 Disabled Adjusted A D 100 4000 C JJ Enabled Raw A D Input 1 Actual Scan 1 000 Secs fiverage Raw Values Clipping Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Figure 4 3 Analog Inputs Advanced Features Filter A weighted sample using a percentage of the last value plus a percentage of the new value The entered data is the percentage of the last value used The default value is 3 The filter is calculated every Scan Period by the formula Last Value x Entered New Value x 100 Entered Filtered Value Adjusted A D 0 The calibrated analog to digital A D reading corresponding to zero percent input This value is used to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the zero percent input exactly at the Low Reading EU value to eliminate transmitter and system errors The default value is 800 Adjusted A D 100 The calibrated A D reading corresponding to 100 percent input This value is used to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value is alter
42. Status If the modem appears to be powered up and operating this read only parameter indicates OK 9 5 2 RBX Features The RBX alarming feature is available for the Host communication ports This feature allows the GridBoss to call in to a Host computer when an alarm occurs Refer to Section 9 6 1 RBX Configuration Overview on page 9 16 If you are using the RBX Alarming feature press the RBX Features pushbutton displayed in the GridBoss Comm Ports screen to display the dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 9 9 You can now configure the port for RBX as well as for Store and Forward Rev 9 99 9 13 GRIDLINK User Manual ward Path Address H1 Group H1 Host Address Address HZ Grog HZ Host Group i Address H3 from H3 REH Alarm Index a REX Status Inactive cl Figure 9 9 RBX Features Retry Counts Three Retry Counts are possible Retry Count 1 Retry Count 2 and Retry Count 3 Retry Counts are the number of retry times a message is repeated if a valid response is not obtained on the first attempt Note that the three Retry Count parameters are each with an associated Retry Delay parameter This allows you to set up different length delays for successive retry Selecting Fixed Num allows you to enter a value for how many retry times a message is repeated after the fist unsuccessful attempt Note that a O entry causes no retries Selecting continuous 255 causes continuous retries that can only be st
43. Type The second part such as A 3 indicates the Point Number The third part is a mnemonic indicating the selected Parameter such as EU for the Filtered Engineering Units Parameter CAUTION Do not alter the pre configured default history points 7 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Table 7 3 GridBoss Point Types Name Point Type Description Name Point Type Description ACCUM Accumulated Value MIN Minutes AGAIN Adaptive Gain MONTH Month AERROR Adaptive Error MONVAL Output Monitor Value ALARM Alarm Code MPULOD Microprocessor Unit Loading AIN Analog Input AO Analog Output OFFCNT Off Counter APC Adaptive Parameters ON CNT On Counter AVGLP Average Low Pressure ONCTR On Counter OUTVAL Output Value CALLS Number of Completed Calls CENTRY Century PCT Radio Power Control CHGOUT Change in Output PIN Pulse Input CHGSP Change in Inner Setpoint PREDCT Predicted Adaptive CHINSP Change in Setpoint PRSVAL Output Pressure Value CLK Real Time Clock COM GridBoss Communication Port R1 R10 FST Registers CURRAW Raw A D Input or RATE Current Rate Raw D A Output CURRNT Current TOD Value REGISTER Register DATAI Soft Point Data SEC Seconds DATA20 DAY Day SCAN Actual Scan Time Actual Loop Period DIN Discrete Input SETPT Setpoint DO Discrete Output SPDBND Setpoint Deadband DR District Regulator SP
44. communicating The defaults of 1 and 0 are used by most Host driver software This Host Address is also the destination address when Store and Forward is used Valid entries include 0 to 247 Store and Forward Path Enter the Address and Group numbers of the GridBoss devices that will need to receive this RBX message and forward it on to the next device to extend the communications path You may also specify addresses for other devices that support the GridBoss protocol The device specified by the last non zero Address Group then sends the message to the Host specified by the previous parameter Valid entries include 0 to 247 Refer to Configuring Report by Exception on page 9 16 Rev 9 99 9 15 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 6 CONFIGURING REPORT BY EXCEPTION You can configure spontaneous Report by Exception RBX to allow the GridBoss to monitor for alarm conditions and upon detection of an alarm automatically report the alarm to a Host computer This can be performed over any kind of communications link dial up modem radio or serial line as long as the Host is set up for receiving field initiated calls This appendix contains the following sections 9 6 1 RBX Configuration Overview The major steps for configuring RBX in the GridBoss must be performed to prevent nuisance alarms from being sent out during configuration The major steps are Configuring the Communications Port Basic Parameters Configur
45. complete GRIDLINK re connects to the GridBoss re reads its configuration and records the actions in the Event Log To update your hardware 1 Select Update Hardware from the File menu Refer to Figure 2 21 Do you wish to create a new backup or use an existing backup Figure 2 21 Update Hardware Backup 2 Click New or Existing When you create a New backup the GridBoss reinstalls the current configuration of the device after the hardware is installed If you choose Existing backup the GridBoss reinstalls the configuration based on the last backup you created and does not return the GridBoss to its current state GRIDLINK automatically begins saving the hardware configuration Rev 9 99 2 25 GRIDLINK User Manual File brad 10 Data Display History Utilities System Help ing Gridiloss configuration ta disk y ving calibration and communications settings to disk ving existing FSls to disk ower down Gridioss Replace Hardware POWER UP Gridboss press ENTER Figure 2 22 Saving Hardware Configuration When prompted remove power from the GridBoss Replace the hardware Reapply power to the GridBoss As oe Press Enter Refer to Figure 2 23 Download Configuration File Name BACKUP gcf F6 Cancel F8 Download Figure 2 23 Configuration Selection for a District Regulator 2 26 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual By default all components are selected if you do not disabl
46. configuration for a GridBoss on a disk file or to upload a configuration file to a GridBoss The Download option allows you to download the configuration from a GridBoss unit to a disk file or a disk configuration to a GridBoss After selecting Download from the File menu a sub menu displays GridBoss Config to Disk Download the current GridBoss configuration to a disk file Disk Config to GridBoss Upload a disk configuration to a GridBoss TOD Profiles Upload the time of day load profiles to a GB601 DR 2 8 1 Save GridBoss Configuration to Disk The GridBoss Config to Disk option saves the current configuration of the connected GridBoss to a disk file 1 Select GridBoss Config to Disk The Save File dialog box appears Refer to Figure 2 6 2 Type the File Name of the backup file or use the default name which is based on the Group and Address of the device 3 Press OK A file with a GCF extension is created in the default GRIDLINK directory The default GRIDLINK directory is the directory from which you launched the GRIDLINK program The GridBoss Config to Disk GCF file contains the full configuration of the GridBoss except for any FSTs To save FSTs you must use the FST Editor and save the FSTs to a disk file NOTE Back up FSTs by using the Write FST function in the FST Editor 2 20 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual This feature is especially useful when multiple GridBoss units requiring similar
47. configurations are being configured for the first time or when configuration changes need to be made off line The advantage of off line configuration is the ability to perform most of the configuration without connecting to the GridBoss This is also an advantage if you are modifying the configuration of an operating GridBoss since it can minimize down time Off line configuration is performed by taking an existing configuration file opening it and making the desired changes Once a backup configuration file is created it can be loaded into a GridBoss by using the Disk Config to GridBoss function GB601 District Regulator units can only load DR files while GB602 Low Pressure Point units can only load LPP files 2 8 2 Load Disk Configuration to GridBoss The Disk Config to GridBoss option loads GridBoss configuration data from a disk file into a connected GridBoss This dialog box lists the configuration files with the GCF located in the default GRIDLINK directory 1 Select Disk Config to GridBoss from the Download option located in the File menu The Open File dialog box appears Refer to Figure 2 8 2 Select one of the listed files with a GCF extension or choose a different Drive Directory that contains the desired configuration file 3 Press OK Another dialog box appears that lets you select various components of the configuration to be loaded into the GridBoss Refer to Figure 2 17 The File Name of the configuration file
48. describes your data riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data o E Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field Fixed width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Start import at row Zz File Origin Windows ANSI Preview of file C Tawni Fisher GridBoss TOD stuff 02250908 prn 1 Weekday Profile GridBoss Address1 2 Time Downloaded 2 26 99 9 93 52 GridBoss Group2Gr Operator APC Setpoint Change 0 011832 0 011043 Figure 2 12 Excel PRN Import 1 of 3 8 Select the Comma checkbox and click Next Refer to Figure 2 13 Rev 9 99 2 17 GRIDLINK User Manual Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 12 1x This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below elimiters e O Treat consecutive delimiters as one Text Qualifier po T O Semicolon Comma O Other C O Space eekday Profile GridBoss Addressl GridBoss Group2GridBl 29 52 Operator APC Figure 2 13 Excel PRN Import 2 of 3 9 Select the General checkbox and click Finish Refer to Figure 2 14 Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 2 x This screen lets you select each column and set olumn data format the Data Format General General converts numeric values to numbers date O Text values to dates and all remaining values to text O Date MDY y D
49. force local communications to take place in a certain way such as through a selected PC port or at a selected Baud Rate use the Connect pushbutton available through the GridBoss Directory option of the File menu Refer to Section 2 4 for more information 1 30 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 10 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW Configuration of a GridBoss system can be performed off line or on line The advantage of off line configuration is the ability to perform most of the configuration without connecting to the GridBoss This is especially an advantage 1f you are modifying the configuration of an operating GridBoss since 1t can minimize down time Off line configuration is performed by taking an existing configuration file opening it and making the desired changes See Section 2 for details on the Open function in the File menu 1 10 1 Configuration The configuration procedure involves using many of the menu functions in roughly this order note that some may not be required for your application System menu gt Information for English or Metric unit selection System menu gt Clock Grid menu gt Comm with LPP Regulator Control and Holiday Dates GridBoss 601 District Regulator Grid menu gt Comm with DRs and Low Pressure Control GridBoss 602 Low Pressure Point File menu gt GridBoss Directory PC communications I O menu gt AO or DO Two DOs acting as TDOs T O menu gt AI Only when AO is used I O m
50. highest temperature that the ambient temperature Ambient Temp can reach before generating an alarm The control Mode shifts from Adaptive Mode to Outer Loop Mode if the temperature sensor violates the limits Even if alarms are disabled violating this limit causes Adaptive Mode to shift to Outer Loop Mode The default value is 212 degrees F Adaptive Error The change in temperature and the temperature coefficient are used to predict a change in pressure The difference between the predicted and measured pressure change is the Adaptive Error The Adaptive Error and the Adaptive Gain are used to adjust the adaptive temperature coefficient The ambient temperature and temperature coefficient are calculated once per minute Predicted Adaptive Value The change in pressure that has been calculated from the adaptive temperature coefficient and the temperature change If in Adaptive Mode this value is added to the Inner Loop Setpoint every minute along with any change in Inner Loop Setpoint from the LPP The ambient temperature and temperature coefficient are calculated once per minute Current TOD Value The current time of day value being used by the DR From the time of day and temperature profile a Predicted Adaptive Value and a Current Time of Day Value can be calculated If in Adaptive Mode these values are added to the Inner Loop Setpoint every minute along with any change in Inner Loop Setpoint from the LPP 3 14 Rev 9 99 GRID
51. initially access GRIDLINK and establish security parameters delete the default Operator ID APC and default password 1234 to prevent unauthorized users from accessing and changing parameters Rev 9 99 8 1 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 2 1 GRIDLINK Operator Select the GRIDLINK Operator or GRIDLINK Security option under Security in the Utilities menu to edit the log ons of all users of the GRIDLINK software on that PC The GRIDLINK Security screen that appears allows you to specify the Operator ID Password and Level of up to 21 different users Refer to Figure 8 1 File Grid LO Mata Dispi H ru Utilities Syatem Help Eidin farii Iperator TD Paggeard Level Operator ID Pagseerd L l 1 ml 123 i 17 ii 2 nAn 1 18 i 3 LOT fh 19 A tl 20 a i i amp B f i 5 B 3 BH La H 11 a 12 A 13 A l B 15 A 16 8 SRT TE Tiucela ie Configure security Por cers om th ee Li Figure 8 1 GRIDLINK Operator Security Operator ID The Operator ID must be three alphanumeric characters typically the initials of the person who will be operating the GridBoss Password The Password should be four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999 Level The Level must be a number from 0 to 6 where Level 0 is the lowest level Level 0 only allows access to the Help menu with limited actions allowed in the File menu namely Direct Connect Print Configuration and Exit Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 and Levels 4 do not have
52. is given at the top of the dialog box Only the point types that are configured both in the GridBoss and in the disk file are selectable in the list 4 By default all components are selected if you do not disable any all point types download and override the current configuration To deselect a component such as System Variables click on the X between the brackets in front of the component Rev 9 99 2 21 GRIDLINK User Manual Download Configuration File Name BACKUP pot TAN Eyzlen Var iabled LSL liscrete Inputs 120 liscrete Output 131 Analog Inputs IHI Analog Outputs ISU Pulse Inputs ISI FST Repistors Tal Sofipoints HI Coma with h PPL IHI Regulator Control Holiday Date sor Listl adio Contr oll Decode Tables IH History Config E can Loa od it ie Tat TES Cancel Figure 2 17 Disk Config to GridBoss Selection for a District Regulator 5 When you are finished selecting components press F8 Download CAUTION Counters accumulators and EU values are changed during a download if the current value is different from the value on the disk file Make sure that any controlled process is safe from abrupt changes due to the downloaded configuration 6 Keep in mind that FSTs are not part of the configuration file Load any FSTs into the GridBoss by using the Read FST function in the FST Editor 2 8 3 Load TOD Profiles When using a District Regulator GB601 unit this option loads time of d
53. is inverted in the Status field ON becomes OFF and vice versa An open circuit in the field would then be indicated as ON in the Status parameter and closed contacts would be indicated as OFF in the Status Accumulated Val Accumulated value is the number of times the discrete input goes from OFF to ON The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a maximum count of 4 294 967 295 The accumulator can be preset by entering the desired value or can be cleared by entering 0 The default value is 0 On Counter Counts the number of scan periods when the Status parameter is in the ON state The On Counter which does not operate in Manual Mode Scanning Disabled is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value The On Counter can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by setting the Status parameter to OFF The default value is 0 Off Counter Counts the number of scan periods when the Status parameter is in the OFF state The counter which does not operate in Manual Mode Scanning Disabled is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value The Off Counter can be preset by entering the desired value or can be cleared by setting the Status parameter to ON The default value is 0 Rev 9 99 4 19 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 5 DO DISCRETE OUTPUT CONFIGURATION Select I O from the menu bar and then choose DO Discrete Outputs are high low ou
54. is started The color schemes and their attributes are described next COLOR Default Root Window al Border attribute a3 Title attribute a5 Background attribute COLOR2 Default Window al Border attribute a3 Title attribute a5 Background attribute COLOR3 Default Status Window a3 Title attribute a5 Background attribute COLOR Default Help List Box al Border attribute a2 Non active highlight bar attribute a3 Normal attribute a4 Active highlight bar attribute a5 Unavailable attribute Rev 9 99 COLOR7 Default Help Push Button al Active attribute a2 Non active attribute a3 Unavailable attribute COLORS Default Help Window al Border attribute a3 Title attribute a5 Background attribute COLOR10 Default Push Button al Button text active a2 Button text non active a3 Button text unavailable a4 Box Border active a5 Box Border non active a6 Button text down a7 Button shadow attribute 1 33 GRIDLINK User Manual COLOR11 Default Radio Button al Marker active attribute a2 Text normal attribute a3 Text unavailable attribute a4 Text normal when active a5 Text unavailable when active COLOR12 Default Check Box al Marker active attribute a2 Text normal attribute a3 Text unavailable attribute a4 Text normal when active a5 Text unavailable when active COLOR13 Default String Entry F
55. minutes that determines how long to wait after the average pressure for the minute has been outside of the Setpoint Deadband at the LPP Once this time is expired the LPP begins checking the average pressure for the minute versus the Setpoint Deadband again The default value is 10 minutes When the pressure at the LPP goes out of the Setpoint Deadband the LPP calls each DR and starts a timer foreach DR The timer is the value entered in the Deadband Time Delay for DRs If the timer expires and the LPP pressure Avg Low Press Value is still out of the Setpoint Deadband the LPP calls each DR again If the LPP is within the Setpoint Deadband the timer process is cancelled When using telephone communications set the Deadband Time Delay for DRs value to a x 2 minutes where a is the number of DRs that the LPP is calling When the LPP communicates with one DR set the value to 2 For two DRs set the value to 4 and so on Error Time Delay for DRs The LPP calls the DR at this rate if the LPP has sensed that the DR is in Manual or Inner Loop Control Modes If the DR is in Manual Mode Inner Loop Mode or the PID is disabled Off Mode the LPP communicates with the DR after the Error Time Delay for DRs has passed to check to see if the DR is in Outer Loop or Adaptive Mode The Error Time Delay for DRs should always be less than the Check in Time for DRs If the DR is against either the Inner Loop Setpoint limit or the Control Output limit the L
56. of day profile Enabled causes the time of day profiles to clear and the Clear Profiles pushbutton returns to Disabled on the next screen update The default value is Disabled TOD Profiles After TOD Profiles have been created the TOD Profiles parameter can be Locked to prevent the DR from generating storing and overwriting the TOD load profiles The default value is Unlocked Ambient Temp The current outside ambient temperature The ambient temperature is updated once a minute The default value is 0 Adaptive Gain This is a multiplier used to adjust the rate at which the system temperature coefficient is learned The value should never be larger than 1 0 The default value is 0 10 Temp Coefficient The DR temperature is stored in a temperature profile which modifies a temperature coefficient every minute In addition the temperature profile does not calculate a new coefficient when the Inner Loop Control Output or Setpoint is against either limit The default value is 0 Rev 9 99 3 13 GRIDLINK User Manual Temp Point Fail Low Limit The lowest temperature that the ambient temperature Ambient Temp can reach before generating an alarm The control Mode shifts from Adaptive Mode to Outer Loop Mode if the temperature sensor violates the limits Even if alarms are disabled violating this limit causes Adaptive Mode to shift to Outer Loop Mode The default value 1s 58 degrees F Temp Point Fail High Limit The
57. ooooonnnccnnnccnonccnonccnoncninnnss 2 20 GridBoss DirectoTy cooccoconccconcnononccnnnncnonccnonaconnnconnncnn 2 4 Advanced Features oocooooccccnnooncnonoccnnnnnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnos 2 7 GLOUPS ies 35 ioe Socks cortinas io Sevbsdes Paes deePishe dus taxes ronca 2 10 GrdBoss Flags i 2255 sssesdees ees scebescndes sido contiene de 9 7 GridBOss GTOUP cccooccconncnonnnonnnnononcnnnnncnonacconcconnccnnncnn 7 7 GridBoss Insturction Manual ccesscseceeeereeees 1 4 GridBoss Memory coccccooccconnnconnnononcnnnnccnonccconaconnnccnnncnn 8 8 GridBoss Point Types sinrin iieii 7 5 GridBoss Types a aun iaa 9 3 GRIDLINK 2002 G 2 GRIDLINK Address oooocccooccconnononccnonccnonnncanaconnnccnnncnn 2 8 GRIDLINK Group ir ata e ae aA e kR 2 8 GRIDLINK Operator ocoooocccnocccccnonanccononannnnonnncccnanannnnno 8 2 GRIDLINK Security File Melia 2 30 GRIDLINK PIF Windows 3 ri 1 22 Windows 95 98 or NT occccnncccncnnncnonnnnnnnininonos 1 23 GridMana ger niies nites aao O EE G 2 GROUP si A OT 2 6 2 8 9 4 GLOUDS iro OS 2 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual H Halt PID on ReSet inrsin a 3 12 Hang Up Command oooooccocccnoncnonnncnnonccnoncnnonccnonacionacinns 2 9 Hangup asisiinesiigidniaiagistiiagintdistais 2 5 Hardware Update mico initial heii aie 2 25 Hel About ROCLINK Version cceeeecseeeeereeees 10 5 Context SensitivVe ccccceceesssssscccceceeeeeeeees 1 14 10 2 Getting Started cuts leen eaen seks E
58. or click with the mouse to reactivate the menu bar Alt or F10 When nothing is highlighted on the menu bar press the Alt or F10 key to reactivate the bar by highlighting File If you are in a screen pressing the Alt or F10 key activates the menu bar for making a menu selection which effectively cancels any actions being performed on the screen To return to the screen from the menu bar use the Esc key F9 When a menu item or a screen item is highlighted press the F9 key to display the Help window Any available information about the item displays You can use the Index pushbutton in the Help window to get a list of help topics When you are done with the Help window use the Cancel pushbutton or the Esc key F1 through F8 In most configuration screens some of these keys are identified as pushbuttons at the bottom of the screen When the pushbutton is present it works as follows F1 Update Revert to the last saved data of the screen or refresh the display with the latest data F2 Prev Page to the previous point of this type For example if the screen for Analog Input point number A2 is currently displayed pressing F2 Prev causes the screen for point number Al to display F3 Next Page to the next point of this type For example if the screen for Analog Input point number A1 is currently displayed pressing F3 Next displays the screen for point number A2 F4 Copy Copy the configuration data shown in t
59. questa Figure 5 7 Configurable Opcode Table Rev 9 99 5 11 GRIDLINK User Manual Table Number This field shows a Table Number for the Opcode screen Table Number is a number between 1 and 4 Access other Opcode tables by using the F2 Prev and F3 Next keys Version Number This field defines a Version Number for the data configured in the Opcode screen If the configuration is changed then the Version Number should be updated This location can also be used as a sequence number by the Host computer to make sure that read write communications are operating properly The Version Number is a floating point number Data 1 to 44 The Data fields contain the Point Type Point Logical Number and Parameter of the data for this position in the Transmit or Receive Buffer Pushbuttons which are initially labeled Undefined are used as an aid for the configuration of the Data fields Opcode 10 is used by the Host to specify a specific Data field and request the information contained in that Data field Data 22 44 Use the pushbutton labeled Data 22 44 to access the rest of the Data fields NOTE Interpret the information on the Data pushbutton for example AIN A 3 EU in the following manner The first part is a three character mnemonic in this example A IN means Analog Input that indicates the Point Type The second part such as A 3 indicates the Point Number The third part is a mnemonic indicating the selected
60. ratio of the output span to input span The sign of the number specifies the action of the loop negative for reverse action the default or positive for direct action Reverse action causes the PID loop point to produce a decrease in output to close a valve for example when the Low Pressure Value process variable exceeds the Setpoint DR Comm Enable or disable communications with the currently selected District Regulator Alarms You can either enable or disable alarm logging for communications between the LPP and the currently selected DR If you enable Alarms the RBX Alarm Options pushbutton becomes active Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log If you disable Alarms no alarm logging is generated for this LPP regardless of the Alarm configuration The default value is Enabled DR Connect Command This command provides the modem with a telephone number to dial out and is the telephone number of the DR with which you desire to communicate A typical command for AT command set modems is shown in the following example Refer to the modem manufacturer s instructions for more information Dial Command ATDT 18005151212 dial the number 1 800 515 1212 tone dialing where ATDxX NOTE The telephone numbers must include the exact sequence required at the PC In certain cases access numbers such as 9 and area codes 1 212 may be required Rev 9 99 3 17 GRIDLINK User Manual DR Retry Time
61. screen to setup the Outer Loop File Grid L a Tata Mis e je em Help pe Ma e Lontro Toy FID Conte Low Pressure Input eT all Low Press Value 000000 on E t for Dis Low Press Setpoint E 4 11 il Selooint Deadbend 8 35 1 1041 Ava Low Press Value U BOG Check in Time for Ds ma Mira Deadband lume Delay for Les 10 Hina Error lime Delay for Rs _ 68 Kins Low Battery Voltage Limit 114 Yol ts Low Press Point Fail Low Limit i Low Press Point Fail High Limit Lag Active Maras Hone MENU DT PETER tacte identifier Por the Figure 3 14 Low Pressure Control Tag Name of the control loop at the LPP you are configuring Enter up to 10 characters to identify the control loop point being defined in this screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The default value is PID Contrl Low Pressure Input Analog Input point used by the Low Press Value process variable Refer to Section 3 2 2 I O Definitions on page 3 8 The default value is Analog Input point number A2 Low Press Value The pressure you are monitoring at the low pressure point in the distribution system This is the current value of the process variable which is determined by the input definition I O Definition The default value is 0 Low Press Setpoint The Setpoint around which the Low Press Value process variable is controlled The default value is 9 0 Setpoint Deadband A window around t
62. selected one of the monitor functions a screen appears that shows the requested point information such as field I O values or calculated flow values These on screen values are automatically updated by the GRIDLINK software In each screen if there are additional points to view you can use the Next Set and Prev Set pushbuttons 6 3 1 Monitor Discrete Input The monitor display for Discrete Inputs shows up to five Discrete Input points on one display If the GridBoss you are monitoring has more than five Discrete Input points including diagnostic inputs use Next Set and Prev Set to view points Refer to Figure 6 22 File Grid L U Data Misplo gh ercu LLLA es System Help iscrete al Point Humber Sti B_ Point Tag Id bE Aer I bi iris A Ot bella rae talus 00 A TOTO cumulated Val k H i ii EU Value F al F it er i beg TH Figure 6 22 Monitor Discrete Inputs 6 14 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 6 3 2 Monitor Discrete Output The monitor display for Discrete Outputs shows up to five Discrete Output points on one display If the GridBoss you are monitoring has more than five Discrete Output points you can view additional points by using Next Set and Prev Set buttons Refer to Figure 6 23 1 150 lt ru ae ee Suro tes lscrete Dufputs a Point Humbe paint Mu a Aune 6 TTT gt talus vato Accumulated Val EU Value F y Figure 6 23 Monitor Discrete Outputs Rev 9 99 6 15 GRIDLINK User Manual
63. serial or bus port used by a mouse or other peripheral device connected to additional communication ports For successful communications the IRQ set up in GRIDLINK must match the IRQ set up for the COM Port being using on the PC You can view the PC s serial port COM Port IRQ from the Windows Control Panel in Windows 95 98 or NT Select Start Settings Control Panel System Device Manager open Ports select desired Com port click Properties and finally view the Resources tab After setting up your communications settings click Connect to establish a connection from the PC to the GridBoss If a communications link is established with the PC the Status Line reads On Line COMx where x is the communications port number being used If the communications link is not established with the PC the message Comm Fail appears indicating that no connection could be made You also receive the response No Response from GridBoss Press Enter to continue In this case you must press Enter to release the program You must reconnect to the GridBoss NOTE If the GridBoss remains idle for too long you may receive the timeout error No Response from GridBoss Press Enter to continue In this case you must press Enter to release the program You must reconnect to the GridBoss 2 4 1 GridBoss Directory Advanced Features When you select a setup in the Comm List and press the Advanced Features pushbutton a dialog box appears Refer to
64. shift keyed FST Function Sequence Table a type of program that can be written by the user in a high level language designed by Fisher Controls G H GB601 District Regulator Controller Fisher Control s microprocessor based unit that provides remote pressure monitoring and control in a GridBoss system GB602 Low Pressure Point Controller Fisher Control s microprocessor based unit that provides remote pressure monitoring and control in a GridBoss system GFA Ground fault analysis GND Electrical ground such as used by the ROC FloBoss or GridBoss controller power supply GP Gauge Pressure GridManager Host software used to configure and monitor GridBoss controllers in a system GRIDLINK Configuration software used to configure GridBoss controllers to gather data as well as most other functions I J G 2 I O Input Output IEC Industrial Electrical Code Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual K Kbytes Kilobytes kHz Kilohertz Kixcel An actuator that receives a control signal Analog Output or Discrete Output pair from the GB601 and converts the signal into an outlet pressure to adjust the Setpoint at the DR L LCD Liquid Crystal Display Display only device used for reading data LED Light emitting diode LOI Local Operator Interface Refers to the serial RS 232 port on the ROC FloBoss or GridBoss controller through which local communications are established
65. span to input Outlet Pressure span The sign of the number specifies the action of the loop negative for reverse action the default or positive for direct action Reverse action causes the control loop point to produce a decrease in output to close a valve for example when the Outlet Pressure exceeds the Setpoint The default value is 1 Error Deadband A window around the Setpoint If the difference between the Outlet Pressure process variable and Setpoint is greater than the Error Deadband a change in output is calculated For example if you enter 5 there will be a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the Setpoint in which the Outlet Pressure can move without affecting the output The default value is 0 10 but should not be less than the accuracy of the pressure transmitter as this causes excessive wear on the output actuator Default Setpoint This is the default Inner Loop control Setpoint that is used when an alarm condition terminates the Outer Loop or the Adaptive Mode and places the Control loop back to Inner Loop Mode The Inner Loop then uses the Default Setpoint value The Default Setpoint is also used if the LPP communicates to the DR that the LPP has a problem such as a low battery error or pressure transmitter failure message or if the LPP fails to call the DR for a period of 9 hours If the Default Setpoint is less than zero then the Setpoint remains at its current value The default value is
66. to as the signal value analog SVA The Compare Flag stores a discrete value called the signal value discrete SVD Depending on the function the Results Register and the Compare Flag may be loaded stored tested modified or left unchanged Mesg 1 and Mesg 2 30 character field for storing a message The message can be displayed by the GridBoss Local Display Panel Code Size The number of bytes used by the FST equivalent to the end pointer position minus the start pointer position Code Pointer Indicates the location in GridBoss memory of the next function to be executed There are O to 7999 storage locations for functions in the GridBoss One storage location is used for each byte that makes up the function 5 2 3 FST Editor Select FST in the Data menu and then select FST Editor to display the screen shown in Figure 5 3 Selecting the FST Editor causes GRIDLINK to suspend operation and load into memory the FST500 EXE program If the FST500 EXE program is not in the current working directory the file is not found and control is passed back to GRIDLINK For information on using the FST Editor see the Function Sequence Table User Manual Form A4625 FST EDITOR SETUP FROM GRIDBOSS OR DISK 1 Setup information from GridBoss 2 Setup information from Disk File ESC Exit and return to GRIDLINK Enter Setup Figure 5 3 FST Editor Rev 9 99 5 5 GRIDLINK User Manual 5 3 SOFT POINTS Selec
67. to contact the DRs The Host disconnects waits a few minutes and then calls the DR again In the DR Grid gt Comm with LPP screen the Last LPP Comm Time field shows if the call from the LPP to the DR occurred If the communications failed a Comm Failed message appears If communications failed check the telephone number DR Connect Command Address and Group information in the DRs and the LPP to verify all values Each communication link between the LPP and the DRs should be tested This ensures system performance and prevents annoying calls to a wrong number Communications from the DR or LPP units to the Host can be tested by enabling RBX alarming and causing an alarm Refer to Section 9 6 Configuring Report by Exception on page 9 16 Rev 9 99 9 21 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 22 This page intentionally left blank Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 10 THE HELP MENU 10 1 SCOPE This section describes how to locate and use the on line help available through the GRIDLINK software The GRIDLINK on line help system should be used in conjunction with the GRIDLINK User Manual and other instruction manuals This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number ontext Sensitive Help 10 2 2 10 elp Contents 10 4 10 4 About 10 5 10 5 As mentioned in Section 1 the major help features in the GRIDLINK software are The Help menu Context sensitive help The Statu
68. user manual for information on modifying the PATH statement or writing a batch file To change the current drive at the DOS prompt type in the drive letter followed by a colon such as C and press Enter To change the current directory type CD followed by a space a backslash and the Target Directory name such as CD AGRIDLINK and then press Enter 2 Type GRIDLINK at the DOS prompt and press Enter or double click the Gridlink exe GRIDLINK EXE icon file The software loads and initializes The time this tames depends on the speed of your computer NOTE You can only run one version of GRIDLINK at a time GRIDLINK does not support multiple copies of GRIDLINK running on the same computer at the same time Rev 9 99 1 27 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 8 LOGGING ON When the GRIDLINK software is loaded the log on screen displays as shown in Figure 1 12 Fisher Controls International Field Nutomation Systems GRODLIME TH Configuration Sof teare Your configuration and operalion window ta these products District Regulator DR Gridloss Los Pressure Point LPP GridBoss Deere or Tl Pazsenpd janas Figure 1 12 Operator Log On Display 1 Type your assigned 3 character identifier ID in the Operator ID field and press Enter or Tab Your initials are typically your identifier The characters show up in the field below Operator ID on the screen If identifiers ha
69. uses the communications parameters configured in the first setup and in the first communications group COMM DIR These settings remain in effect until a new setup group is selected After selecting GridBoss Directory from the File menu the Open File dialog box displays allowing you to select the group file DIR to be opened Refer to Figure 2 3 Typically the group COMM DIR is listed first The COMM DTR is the group that contains the default settings for the LOI Phone Modem and COM ports in the GridBoss Open File File Name dir C GRIDLINK Files Directory Drive COMM DIR 1 dl e io eg E b ii D ance DEFLTO3 DIR D pean DEFLTO4 DIR DEFLTOS DIR DEFLTO6 DIR E DEFLT DIR E DEFLT 8 DIR l Figure 2 3 GridBoss Directory Group Selection 24 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual File Grid 170 Data Uisplay Mistery Utilities System Melo Coma List PC Coma Parameters ad dBoss LOT Deflt f Conner j Gr ide A Me ree one ri Tag GridBoss LOT Delli troup 240 Dela pela fai TN DeFaul i i H CONE loma Default 1 0 iit ma al DeFaul 4 ll IRH all DeFaul Default Adwanced slo DaFaul Default Defmuli Defmuli l FS leobag I Fi Pacio E fe TA MEE ta lion setup From te 4 ia Lii Figure 2 4 PC Comm Parameters Group Dialog When you select a group file a list of all GridBoss communication setups in the group appears in the Comm List along with the
70. want the Discrete Output status on an active transition of the output from OFF to ON to change to ON and remain in that state until it is cleared To be cleared the Status parameter must be changed to the OFF state either by the software or by you Time Duration TDO When the TDO Timed Duration Output mode is enabled the TDO Parameters pushbutton becomes available The TDO Parameters pushbutton provides a dialog box of additional parameters to specify scaling and engineering unit conversion For Timed Duration Output the quantitative value calculated by the PID loop is converted into a time that the discrete output is active versus the time it is inactive similar to an analog output Refer also to Appendix A Toggle Select Toggle if you want the Discrete Output to enter the Toggle mode Toggle mode enables a square wave output for which Both the Time On and Time Off are defined by the Time On parameter Time On and Time Off are equal Rev 9 99 4 21 GRIDLINK User Manual TDO Toggle Select TDO Toggle if you want the Discrete Output to enter the TDO Toggle mode In the TDO Timed Duration Output Toggle mode the DO continuously repeats in a cycle defined by the Cycle Time parameter with the on time duration being controlled by the EU Value parameter Select TDO Parameters pushbutton to set the Cycle Time and EU Value parameters Refer to Appendix A Scanning These options let you enable or disable Scanning
71. your data Refer to Section 2 7 2 1 Viewing TOD Profiles on page 2 16 2 7 2 1 Viewing TOD Profiles Time of day profiles can be saved and viewed in spreadsheet format NOTE The following process describes how to load a TOD Profile using Microsoft Excel The spreadsheet application with which you are using may differ from the following example To view a TOD Profile in Excel 1 Save a TOD Profile using the Collect GridBoss Data function described in Section 2 7 on page 2 14 2 Launch Excel 3 Select Open from the File menu 4 Select All Files from the Files of Type drop down list box located at the bottom left of the screen Refer to Figure 2 11 2 16 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Open Lookin C TOD stuff y ajaja prn Op en 02250908 tod 8 02250908 xls Find files that match these search criteria File name Files of type All Files y Last modified any time w 4 file s Found Figure 2 11 Locate TOD Profile PRN Navigate to the correct directory C GRIDLINK or where GRIDLINK is installed where the TOD Profile is stored and select the PRN file In Figure 2 11 02250908 prn is the target file 6 Click Open Refer to Figure 2 11 Select Delimited and Windows ANSI and click Next Refer to Figure 2 12 Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 2 The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited If this is correct choose Next or choose the Data Type that best
72. 11 Pl 18 BE 1A DE DE BE BE 03 30 99 03 30 99 Bb SESS RHHEERRESEE A dd Figure 2 9 Open Event Log File After selecting a configuration file type you may proceed with configuration from the Grid menu I O menu and Data menu as if connected to a GridBoss unit Select the default configuration file to edit changing the point configuration that will be used by the New function to create new configuration files The File Name appears on the Status Line at the bottom of the screen to indicate the file being edited 2 7 COLLECT GRIDBOSS DATA The Collect GridBoss Data option allows you to easily save various GridBoss data to disk files or you can use the Save pushbutton when you view logs see Section 7 After selecting Collect GridBoss Data from the File menu a sub menu displays to allow you to select the data you want to save The menu has four options All TOD Profiles History Events Alarms 2 14 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual After selecting All a default File Name displays in the Save File dialog box Refer to Figure 2 10 Save File File Name C AGRIDLINK Directory Drive OK A cs Cancel 5 Hel All the files will be saved under the same name with their own extensions Figure 2 10 Collect GridBoss Data You can either accept the default File Name or enter a new name under which the file is saved To change the File Name type over t
73. 117 87 9944014 REH Alm Set OVERFLOW Invalid Alarm 117 46 119 53 5 ABU ndeFined 15 107 42 56 8 DAT 16 AGU ndo Firod 110 62 10 39 1725 41 43 95lUndeFinad 33 l 53 16 a 16 1BUndeFined 42 10 65 175 99 95 123 4TUndeFinad 6 953 18604 Ba 17 53124 linde inead T1 107 5 a O i Tul Frey El a Mos Block Disple alar s O o o ooo oO COA Figure 7 9 Alarm Log History Rev 9 99 7 15 GRIDLINK User Manual 7 16 This page intentionally left blank Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 8 THE UTILITIES MENU 8 1 SCOPE This section describes the GRIDLINK Utilities menu used in establishing security and creating macros The Utilities menu also contains options for viewing the GridBoss memory and calibration values This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number xample Macro dd 8 ridBoss Memor 8 4 8 8 alibration Values 8 9 8 2 SECURITY If you are logged on at the highest level 6 when you select Utilities from the menu bar and choose Security the options to choose from are GRIDLINK Operator GridBoss Logon Select GRIDLINK Operator to edit the log ons of all users of the GRIDLINK software on this PC and the edit other options to control who is allowed access to a connected GridBoss Initially you may access GRIDLINK and the GridBoss using the default Operator ID APC and default password 1234 CAUTION After you
74. 2X012 GridManager User Manual Form A6083 Part Number D301134X012 Function Sequence Table FST User Manual Form A4625 Part Number D301058X012 ROC FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 Part Number D301061X012 ROC Protocol User Manual Form A4199 Part Number D301053X12 Type 662 Kixcel Remote Control Pilot Drive Actuator Part Number D102273X012 RRE Re Re e 1 4 PRODUCT OVERVIEW To better understand the information contained in this manual this section provides a brief overview of the operation of the equipment 1 4 1 GRIDLINK Configuration Software The GRIDLINK Configuration Software provides the capability to monitor configure and calibrate the GridBoss Gas Pressure Control system units The software runs on an IBM compatible personal computer PC using DOS 5 0 or higher GRIDLINK can also run as a DOS application with Microsoft Windows 3 1 Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT The software is supplied on a 3 5 inch floppy disk Some of the many functions provided are see Figure 1 2 on page 1 13 for a complete list of functions Configuring I O points including Sensor Module inputs Proportional Integral and Derivative PID feedback control loop calculations and the history database 4 Configuring communications setup between the GridBoss 601 District Regulator Controller the GridBoss 602 Low Pressure Point Controller and the Host computer Retrieving historical event
75. 3 Discreta ana G 1 Discrete Inputss cialis G 1 Discrete OUtputs aci libelo oe eel G 1 Disk Config to GridBOSS ccooconnoccconoccnonccnonacionacinnnss 2 21 DE otetsdidetedsutuesessens todays sgoeetestessetp eens 6 1 Adding Live Data ononnonononncnoncnconanonnonononncnoranonnaso 6 8 A NE 6 4 Display Configuration LED UserList el ss 5 13 Display Data Chantin te sn tonera ane eaae EErEE Nea aS 6 11 COPYN E kian en sien e eaters naaa ea e ERa 6 10 A REE O EA EEEE A 6 11 Display Mens noen eee kleeren eaan enap ae esn nt 6 1 Display e Tenet ot enean e ae a es a a a 6 1 Display on Disk ooooocnnocccnonccnonnccononnonnnononcn nnccnnno 6 12 Monitors E EE E T 6 14 Display On Disk cirai aora asasena Es Sia 6 12 Displays OVerview a eare eneen e e aara eaS e 1 8 District Reg lator oaos hoier ois aeta nieres G 2 DR titi hiss ET 1 5 District Regulator Controller GrHidBoss601 i 4 cin wie wos S 1 1 DO Accumulated Val aa eraa aE 4 24 Advanced Features oooooooocccnnooncnononcncnonncconnanncnnonnnos 4 24 Configura oil 4 20 GRIDLINK User Manual Discrete Outputs tsanalcta iodo a 4 20 DOU asias acierta alicia 7 5 DOUP TD uste ita 4 21 Lahaina 4 21 Momentary asip nanna a aae 4 21 Monitor aea A aii 6 15 Point Number estoicos loci RATER 4 20 S CAMMING ae alicia E AAE OERA a 4 22 E 4 21 Status on Power Reset oooooooocccncccccnooocccnncccnnnnannnnns 4 24 OST 4 21 TDO ParameterlS ei E EEEE EE 4 23 TDO TOLSE aor E TE A 4 22 Torla TE T
76. 3 Figure 6 4 GridBoss Character Display Third Set a 6 3 Figure 6 5 GridBoss Character Display Fourth Set a Aia 6 3 Figure 6 6 GridBoss Character Display Fifth Set Dr E EEOAE 6 4 Figure 6 7 GridBoss Character Display Sixth Set ind 6 4 Figure 6 8 GridBoss Character Display Seventh Set a oa 6 4 Figure 6 9 GridBoss Character Display Eighth Set cobb gus iia 6 4 Figure 6 10 New Display Example 1 0 6 5 Figure 6 11 New Display Example 2 6 6 Figure 6 12 New Display Example 3 6 7 Figure 6 13 Save Display s 6 7 Figure 6 14 Value Description Window 6 8 Figure 6 15 Change Data Verification Dialog 6 8 Figure 6 16 Displaying Live Data 6 9 Figure 6 17 Copying Custom Display Data 6 10 Figure 6 18 Pasting Custom Display Data 6 11 Figure 6 19 Custom Display ooocconnccnonncnonccnon 6 12 Figure 6 20 Open Display Dialog 6 12 Figure 6 21 Display from Disk on onnnnnnnnn 6 13 Figure 6 22 Monitor Discrete Inputs 6 14 Figure 6 23 Monitor Discrete Outputs 6 15 Figure 6 24 Monitor Analog Input 6 16 Figure 6 25 Monitor Analog Outputs 6 17 Figure 6 26 Monitor Pulse Input eee 6 18 Figure 6 27 District Regulator Outer Control Loop Mont id i rd 6 19 Figure 6 28 Low Pressure Point Inn
77. 4 2 3 20 Low Pressure Control 3 5 3 21 Rev 9 99 3 1 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 1 COMM WITH LPP When using a District Regulator Controller select Comm with LPP under the Grid menu to display the Communications with the LPP screen The Communications with the LPP screen is used to configure the LPP Tag name LPP Address and LPP Group of the Low Pressure Point Controller assigned to control this District Regulator Controller The LPP controller can communicate with up to five DR units Each DR contains information about the LPP that validates the communications between the DR and LPP LPP Tag LPF LPP Address E55 LPP Group 2 PE to LFP 5 J DUH Enabler A LoT i paste Last LPP Comm Time Qrad 00 00 00 Last LPP Press Value 4 0000008 Last Setpoint Change 8 0000000 DR Setpoint at Last Comm Time Within Limits Active LPP Alarm Hone RBM Alarm Dp t ions F lCancelg LERI Save Figure 3 1 Comm with the LPP LPP Tag Name of the LPP assigned to control this DR Enter up to 10 characters to identify the LPP being defined in this screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used The LPP Tag must be a unique value for each LPP Controller used in the system LPP Address Address of the LPP This is the LPP Address assigned to control this DR The LPP Address must be a unique value for each LPP Controller used in the system The default value is 200 LPP Group Group with which the LPP
78. 6 3 3 Monitor Analog Input The monitor display for Analog Inputs shows up to five Analog Input points at a time If the GridBoss you are monitoring has more than five Analog Input points including diagnostic inputs use Next Set and Prev Set to view points Refer to Figure 6 24 Point Number MI Paint Tag Td Id ie rae E hr HT efault efault Filtered tus 8 eseo0m 615000 a Las E roe Figure 6 24 Monitor Analog Input 6 16 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 6 3 4 Monitor Analog Output The monitor display for Analog Outputs shows up to five Analog Output points at a time If the GridBoss you are monitoring has more than five Analog Output points you can view the next five points by using Next Set and Prev Set buttons Refer to Figure 6 25 File Notor 1D Data Displ Histor i Wtilities System Hol malog Utputs E l of Point Musbar Al Paint Teg Td A0 Default its Percent Value in Ells o5 Hlara Code Obeid Alara Code 0000 AA Bu Hanual Bode sal Point Fail Figure 6 25 Monitor Analog Outputs Alarm Code An 8 bit field for informational purposes only If a bitis set to 1 the alarm is active If a bitis set to 0 the alarm is cleared Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 6 3 5 Monitor Pulse Input The monitor display for Pulse Inputs shows up to five Pulse Input points at a time If the GridBoss you are monitoring has more than five Pulse Inputs points you can view the next five points b
79. 70 70 00 70 00 COLOR16 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR17 OF 10 70 0F 07 00 00 00 COLOR18 OF 10 70 0F 07 00 00 00 COLOR19 1F 70 70 07 70 70 70 07 COLOR21 E 70 70 07 00 00 70 00 4 Save the GRIDLINK INI file 1 36 Default numeric entry field Default scroll bar Default editbox Default listbox Default menu Template radio button Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 2 THE FILE MENU 2 1 SCOPE This section describes how to connect the GRIDLINK Configuration Software to the GB600 Series Controllers This section also contains information for accessing the GridBoss controllers creating saving loading documenting configuration files and exiting the GRIDLINK Configuration Software This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number File Menu Overview 2 2 2 ridBoss Director 2 4 2 4 ridBoss Directory Advanced Features 2 4 1 2 7 Establishing GridBoss Directory Groups 2 4 2 2 10 ommunication Problems 2 4 3 2 1 2 5 2 1 E z DR District Regulator Configuration PP Low Pressure Point Configuration 2 5 2 2 1 Open 2 6 2 12 ollect GridBoss Data 2 7 2 14 All 2 7 1 2 15 Histor 2 7 4 2 19 Download 2 8 2 20 ave GridBoss Configuration to Disk 2 8 1 2 20 Load Disk Configuration 2 8 2 2 21 onvert 2 11 2 27 Print Configuration 2 12 2 29 RI
80. Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used Value The Value in engineering units of the last analog output scan In Manual Mode a Value can be entered to override the output The default value is 4 Units A 10 character name for the engineering units EU assigned to the analog output For example PSIG degrees F or volts Low Reading EU The engineering units corresponding to zero percent output The Analog Output takes the EU Value converts it to a digital to analog D A value and transmits the value to the AO If the EU Value is less than the Low Reading EU the engineering unit is set equal to the Low Reading EU before converting it to a D A value The D A value sent is the Raw D A Output The D A value is scaled using the Adjusted D A 0 and the Adjusted D A 100 values set in the AO Advanced Features dialog The default value is 4 High Reading EU The engineering units corresponding to 100 percent output The Analog Output takes the EU Value and converts it to a D A value and transmits the value to the AO If the EU Value is greater than the High Reading EU the EU Value is set equal to the High Reading EU before converting it to a D A value The D A value sent is the Raw D A Output The D A value is scaled using the Adjusted D A 0 and the Adjusted D A 100 values set in the AO Advanced Features dialog The default value is 20 Scanning These options let you enable or disable scanning for this point
81. Boss If the request requires a response a value or information may then be sent back to a Host device The Opcode value may also be a command that causes the GridBoss to perform an action or a set of actions such as collecting the current Pulse Input values and then sending the data back to the Host When the Host device desires to know a specified value or parameter stored in the GridBoss an Opcode value is sent to the GridBoss specifying the value or parameter required by the Host The Opcode value may be a command which causes the GridBoss to perform a desired action such as changing the Tag for a Analog Input Point Number A3 or using Opcode 8 to request the GridBoss to set the Time parameter in the Clock In this case the GridBoss performs the action but does not return a value to the Host CAUTION Do not alter the default Opcode Point Definitions File Grid DU Data de Tis Mistura aT ca F AMES Ol L oO z Tont igure ah Table Hueber i Version Number a Data mj CA Date ws CPE n LPP Data 815 DIC IEA Data 2 MAA Data n TETA Data 16 Dc ees Data 53 ELLE Deta NI ee CRT y ma El MELLEL Data He CAES J Dete 411 DRE H 1 HUDE a Data 18 DRE 4 1 il Tet Data 85 LPP 1 ok ior y Data HL A y Data 19 Dae a LERE g Data 66 LPP LUN J Data H13 DRT ALUR Data 0 pac E ME Data E7 LPP IMEI Data Hie DRE H 1 SCAR A Data 621 DRC A Leni J sa Bi pa Data ie Endara TES Tesi TES Nain TEE Cancel DES aot parameters to be imc
82. Boss with communication settings of 8 data bits 1 stop bit No parity Refer to Section 8 for instructions on setting the Security options NOTE An LOI cable may be purchased as an accessory from Fisher Controls When you launch GRIDLINK select Direct Connect to establish a connection through the LOI port of the GridBoss currently attached to the PC After your initial connection you may set up other communication parameters After selecting Direct Connect from the File menu the GRIDLINK program attempts to establish communications through COM1 of the PC at one of the following baud rates 19200 9600 and 4800 If this is unsuccessful the program then attempts to establish communications through COM2 COM3 and COMA of the PC successively until it receives a valid reply If the link is established with the GridBoss the GRIDLINK menu bar is updated in keeping with the available functions One of two events can occur when using Direct Connect Ifa communications link is established with the PC the Status Line reads On Line COMx where x is the communications port number being used If a communications link is not established with the PC the message Comm Fail appears in the Status Line indicating that no connection could be made You also receive the response No Response from GridBoss Press Enter to continue In this case you must press Enter to release the program If the Direct Connect communication link fail
83. Character Set block to display the lower case alphabet letters Rev 9 99 6 5 GRIDLINK User Manual 11 Place your cursor to the right of the I and type nputs Your screen should look like Figure 6 11 File Meter I 0 Data Displa Histor Utilities System Hel Analog Inputs aracter Set p 1 k C E E 6 r a c e g ey to enter upper area ine Figure 6 11 New Display Example 2 NOTE To save time you can create custom displays using all upper or lower case letters 6 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 12 Press Next Set three times to display the Character Set in Figure 6 12 Analog Inputs Point Tag Hi El Low Ell Filtered Elis Alarm Character Sat ABEeHE F amp wHIslE BAW OP ES TUVO Xx ZE e tp ye amp pp te toe I arta G e OR IATA Figure 6 12 New Display Example 3 13 Place your cursor on the line below Analog Inputs and type a fourteen times to create a double horizontal line The 4 Character Set Figure 6 5 must be displayed to perform this action 14 Change to the appropriate Character Sets and add the rest of the text to the screen shown in Figure 6 12 15 Press Save and save the new display to a File Name as you desire 16 Click OK Refer to Figure 6 13 Sw File File Mame AT ds C VOR TD TAR DirectoryiDrive C E A A 1 B Lance 0 an Figure 6 13 Save Display Rev 9 99 6 7 GRIDLINK User Man
84. DLINK Securit 2 13 2 30 Macros 2 14 2 30 Exit Alt X 2 15 2 30 Rev 9 99 2 1 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 2 FILE MENU OVERVIEW The File menu contains all functions associated with accessing the GridBoss creating saving loading documenting configuration files and exiting the GRIDLINK Configuration Software The File menu appears initially before connecting to a GridBoss as shown in Figure 2 1 After GRIDLINK connects to a GridBoss or opens a configuration file for off line configuration the menu appears with the selections displayed in Figure 2 2 For off line configuration the Collect GridBoss Data Update Hardware Update Firmware Print Configuration and Download functions are unavailable Direct Connect GridBoss Directory Convert GridLink Security Macros Figure 2 1 File Menu Before Connecting 2 2 File Direct Connect GridBoss Directory New Open Collect GridBoss Data Download Update Firmware Update Hardware Convert Print Configuration Exit ALT X Figure 2 2 File Menu After Connecting Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 3 DIRECT CONNECT The Direct Connect option allows you to set up communications with the GridBoss quickly if the default communication parameters apply For the Direct Connect option to work security conditions must be met and the IBM compatible personal computer PC must be connected to the LOI port of the Grid
85. Display History Utilities System Help Analog Inputs Analog Inputs Point Tag a al eae Point Ta Hi El E ee Hi EU Low FU 3 1 6 Low Ell are Elle 13 1 3 Filtered Els ee j i Ta a Ce CE da a Figure 6 19 Custom Display 6 2 3 Display On Disk Select Display from the menu bar and then choose Display on Disk The Display on Disk option reads a display from a previously saved DSP file translates the data fields and updates the data When you select Display on Disk you are presented with a display listing the names of all the files that have the DSP extension and are located in the GRIDLINK default drive and directory Refer to Figure 6 20 Change the Drive and Directory as needed to locate the desired display file pen File File Mame dep C WOR TDL TAK Files Directory lr ive E Cancel F Figure 6 20 Open Display Dialog Upon selecting a display file the display appears on screen with any data fields showing the current values Refer to Figure 6 21 6 12 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual File Grid L Data Display History Utilities Swstew Help Analog Inputs Analog Irmuts Paint Tag Line Press Point Tag ET Hi Ell 0 Hi El 213 Low EL j Low Ell 5 Filtered Elis a Filtered EUs o Alarm CIAT Alarm ATT Figure 6 21 Display from Disk The following pushbuttons are available at the bottom of the screen Update Use this pushbutton to cause a one time update of all live data
86. E Da 4 22 Unit ica lcait 4 24 LDOYRAWistcicitncosroaiic accord agate cate 7 5 TOATO Tesco sito torcida 7 5 MAA a aE Ara 3 13 Temp Point Fail High Limit oonnocnncccnonccconcnonaninannno 3 14 Temp Point Fail Low LiMit ooonnocnnncononccconcncnnnnannss 3 14 A 3 10 7 3 Testing CommunicatiONS ocoooccconcncnnanononccionacancnnnnass 9 20 Time Created neiere a n A REER 9 6 Time Downloaded ocooooocccnnnocccnnonoconnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 7 8 Time of Day Profiles ooonoccnnnccnonaccnonanonccionaconnnos 2 15 Time ON noti 4 22 Timed Duration OUtpUt occoooncccnonnnonncinnononacinon 4 23 A 1 TDO wii aaa 4 21 Tis 2 7 2 8 IN 2 7 TIMET e iii E 5 4 TER G 5 TMPVA Limas naaa 7 5 TOD Profiles iii 2 16 2 22 3 13 Collect GridBoss Data ooooocnocccnonccnoncccnnnnoncc nnnos 2 14 TOD Uta aa 2 15 NIC WIDE cosas ori coe anes 2 16 POSSE ici kh eink di cis 4 21 Totaliz on in henge ae A el Soe cd eee 7 6 Trackball add 1 8 Troublesho0otiN8 ooooooccconcccnonncnonncconcnononcnnnnccnonacinnnos 2 10 Testing Communications ooooccocccnonncnoncnonnncnnnncnnnos 9 20 TM aaa 3 7 TX Delay iii idos cule ci 2 8 EXD iio oe cents G 5 O 7 8 Type 662 Kixcel See KIXCEl dcir ideas 1 4 U o Pectecnc tes Saves N sd 9 4 A 2 UDATTOW ieiet ioaiten as t a S eo ense 1 14 Upda nean e e oleada 6 13 a T ET 1 10 Update Firmwate sca eonte ee a i a 2 23 Update Hardware iaa isna i a 2 25 Upgrading GRIDLINK 1 18 1 20 1 21 1 22 Up
87. E E EE EEN 2 23 Firmware Information ooonoccnocccnnonnoncconncnnnnccnonancnnnnnnnn 9 5 Fisher LD EEEE TT 9 5 Fisher Type 662 Kixcel Remote Control Pilot Drive Actuator A o E EAT 1 4 Flauta on 9 7 Flash RO Mica dilo cies G 2 FLG GridBoss Flags s0lsc3 ccespteatlseeteseoessdeaseeteee 7 5 1 6 EMail adan aes ion tees G 2 F rce Bnd Of DaVinci orinal ceci 9 4 Force Update nds ile 3 16 IR O G 2 BS E neces aadalcs eis teatatieens 2 20 5 2 7 5 G 2 Advanced Features cccccccessssecesteceeesneeeeeeeenees 5 4 Parameters acicate silos rain ini canes 5 2 Register niriana aaa a A aa i 5 2 FSE D tdrau ienn ea R R E aa 7 6 O E ES 5 5 ANS A AT T 5 3 FST Time Mi ptr 7 6 FST Time Sec inneu in 7 6 Function Screens ooooocccoooconcnonocnnononcnonnncnncnnnncnnnnnnnnoss 1 12 Function Sequence Table FST User Manual 1 4 1 22 G Getting Started Menu Item 10 2 GFA emitida iaa G 2 Gusto niin diate ini 2 11 GND jini ae da G 2 GP rapid inline deRiaginias G 2 GPO encarta ias G 2 GridBoss OVNI Wii 1 1 1 4 GridBoss 601 District Regulator Controller ooononconiccnoncccnncconos 1 1 GridBoss 602 Low Pressure Point Controller ooonocccnnnnnccccinnncos 1 1 GridBoss AddresS oocccooccccnonoccnnnonoccnnnoncnoconnncnonannnnnnnno 7 7 GridBoss Address and GTOUP cccooccnooncnonncnonccinnnccnnncnn 2 6 GridBoss Config File O renn Bos a supheseeteuvets Sines aade aeei 2 12 GridBoss Config to Disk
88. E EEE Se aeea 9 7 Weekday Profile oonoonnccnnonccioncnncncnocncnnnccnnnonn 2 22 2 23 Weekend Holiday Profile ooononconnnccnonnnonnnon 2 22 2 23 Windows OS hatere epena nds ea eeina a akes 1 25 Windows 98 is O 1 25 Windows N Doea r a a E 1 25 Write to Internal Config Memory ooococcoccconcconncnanncnnnes 9 9 Y Z NDY TO ia on 7 5 YEAR 2 EE 7 5 If you have comments or questions regarding this manual please direct them to your Fisher Representative or contact FAS Technical Documentation c o Fisher Controls International Inc 1612 South 17th Avenue Marshalltown lowa 50158 FAX 515 754 3630 I 12 Rev 9 99
89. ESA 4 21 DO Close Point sinesmenei n E RR 3 10 DO Open Point commininianiaa nE Na e Sa 3 10 DOWN ATOW o E TN E manus 1 14 Dow load ccvoviconinninicnona tica a E R 2 20 Load Disk Configuration to GridBoss 2 21 Save GridBoss Configuration to Disk 2 20 TOD Profiles coccion 2 22 Download ConfiguratiON ccooccnonccnonccononncnnnncnonacinnnss 2 22 DP aid G 1 DR Address a 3 16 DR COMM sisi ies ced coeds iea EEA EA EE EE ib eds 3 17 DR Communication Status ooooccnnnncccnoncncnnoncnonnnnnnnnos 3 18 DR Configuration cccooccconcncnonnnnonnccnnnnononcnnnnccnonacinnoss 2 12 DR Connect Command cooccccoocccnnnonccnnnnonannnononcnnninnnnno 3 17 DR Control Status uu neice nike nie 3 18 O 3 16 DR Low Battery icnociciinoricionirciicinn sec eebesesctevcosacostecess 3 7 DR Outlet Press False reen E 3 7 DR Portto LPP 3 cosa ina ceb 3 3 DR Retry COUNT ne ee ep ne Seene Sanik KE ES 3 18 DR R try TME it 3 18 DR Setpoint at Last Comm Time oooooccnnncnonncnnncs 3 3 3 19 DA E EOE 3 16 DIRE eet eee e ah Dette aeea aaee e Ea aA G 1 Duplicating ConfiguratiOM oconocccnonononnconncnoncnnonecinnnos 1 32 DUty Cyclone id pitt E ae G 1 E Edit DisPlYcanna aaa 6 13 EEPROM Laa G 2 ETA A ia G 2 ETA a la ee in stn estat G 2 ETA A ide G 2 EME ta ee in soon ence G 2 EM a enced oie Sees dean a G 2 Enable Seconds t arran e a a 5 9 Enabled Minutes cccccnnooonooooncnoncccnnonnnnnnccnnnnannnnononos 5 9 Englisha e el
90. EXE icon located in the Target Gridlink exe Directory in which you installed GRIDLINK 2 Right mouse click on the GRIDLINK EXE icon 3 Click the Properties option as displayed in Figure 1 9 4 Click the Misc tab as displayed in Figure 1 11 Rev 9 99 1 25 GRIDLINK User Manual Gridlink exe Properties 2 x Screen Misc Foreground r Mouse O QuickE dit DO Exclusive mode Background r Termination Always suspend warn if still active Idle sensitivity Other Low Fast pasting n Windows shortcut keys Alt T ab Ctrl Esc Alt PrtSc Alt Space Alt Esc PrtSe Alt Enter Figure 1 11 GRIDLINK EXE Properties 5 Move the Idle sensitivity slider to Low 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK 1 26 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 7 STARTING THE GRIDLINK SOFTWARE To run the GRIDLINK software from a DOS prompt perform the following steps note that a GridBoss does not need to be physically connected at this point 1 Ensure that the current disk drive and directory is the one in which the GRIDLINK software is installed NOTE If you have added the drive and directory of the GRIDLINK software to the PATH statement in your AUTOEXEC BAT file then you can skip this step OR If a batch file named GRIDLINK BAT has been written that sets the drive and directory and can be located by the PATH statement you can skip this step See your DOS
91. Field Automation Systems GRIDLINK CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE for the GridBoss System User Manual Form A6074 September 1999 Applies to Software Version 1 0 Part Number D301131X012 GRIDLINK User Manual Revision Tracking Sheet September 1999 This manual may be revised periodically to incorporate new or updated information The revision date of each page is indicated at the bottom of the page opposite the page number A major change in the content of the manual also changes the date that appears on the front cover Listed below is the revision date of each page Page Revision All 9199 Notice The GridBoss System discussed in this manual was developed with the assistance of the Gas Research Institute GRI The GRIDLINK software and firmware contained in the GB600 Series Controllers is copyrighted by Fisher Controls International with portions copyrighted by GRI Fisher Controls International Inc 1999 All rights reserved Printed in the U S A While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Fisher Controls does not guarantee satisfactory results from reliance upon such information Nothing contained herein is to be construed as a warranty or guarantee express or implied regarding the performance merchantability fitness or any other matter with respect to the products nor as a recommendation to use any product or process in conflict with any patent Fisher Controls re
92. Figure 4 13 Discrete Inputs When using a LPP Controller an optional I O card must be installed to use Discrete Inputs The F4 Copy and F5 Paste can be used to save configuration time by allowing you to copy data from one configuration screen to another of the same type NOTE If you make changes in the display and then try to quit without saving the changes a message box pops up You can either press Enter to return to the display or press ESC to discard the changes and exit the display Save changes by using the F8 Save The configuration of all I O points is saved to programmable ROM when Write to Internal Config Memory is activated from the GridBoss Flags display Rev 9 99 4 15 GRIDLINK User Manual Point Number The Point Number indicates the location of the point such as rack and module number in the GridBoss The Point Number is automatically assigned by the GridBoss and cannot be edited Each discrete input has a unique Point Number to identify the input Each DI point must be individually configured Refer to Section 4 7 Input and Output Point Numbers on page 4 32 If there is more than one point of this type available in the GridBoss you can page to the other points by using F2 Prev and F3 Next Discrete Inputs are associated with Point Numbers B7 through B10 and are physically located on the I O card Tag Enter up to 10 characters to identify the point being defined in this screen Any alpha
93. For the output to receive and process the field output it must be Enabled While Scanning is Enabled the Status indicates the output state When Scanning is Disabled Manual Mode the analog output is placed into Manual Mode If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled 4 12 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Alarming These options let you enable or disable Alarming for this point If the AO has Alarming Enabled the AO can generate two types of alarms Manual Mode or Point Fail The Manual Mode alarm is generated if the AO is placed into Manual Mode and the Point Fail alarm occurs if the AO hardware reports a malfunction If these alarms occur an alarm event is written to the Alarm Log These alarms can also be set up to generate a spontaneous Report by Exception RBX message on either a Set or a Clear To optimize processor time alarms should be enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm will be logged for this point Active Alarms This field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is disabled the Point Fail alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Advanced Features Refer to page 4 13 After configuring a point and pressing F8 Save use Write to I
94. GridBoss has a total of 35 Daily Historical Logs for the LPP and DR history point parameters The GridBoss logs 35 days of daily history for the LPP and DR parameters and 2 days of daily minimum and maximum values of their parameters The District Regulator parameters include ambient temperature regulator inlet pressure regulator outlet pressure output signal to the Kixcel Kixcel position and battery voltage once a second The LPP parameters include the low pressure point value and battery voltage once a second Rev 9 99 7 11 GRIDLINK User Manual The values are always displayed with the most recent value first Refer to Figure 7 7 ily is ory bridboss Hddress mela Time Downloaded 4 19 99 9 57 43 Operater APT ridkass Log istrict Rg 1 35 HA Base lime Inner Loop Diff Pres immer Loop Inner Loop Inner Loop En iii 0 gagaaag 0 dadggad E gagang 0000000 0 daganna B gagana 000000 ABAD D em Doe Bo TOO o ae eae A AS AA PO AAA E i i 0 a a a i b o SS A A A E O E A e DO e i e ae Figure 7 7 Day History NOTE IN JAG PREVAIL AVG UA AYG HONRA AWG 6 00090 D 1 0000006 OOO 011014 AA a DD a a root 2 8 The time stamp in the GridBoss reflects the time at the end of the period not at the beginning Data collected from 9 20 to 9 21 is time stamped 9 21 You can use the pushbuttons at the bottom of the screen to view other hist
95. LINK User Manual 3 3 HOLIDAY DATES When using a District Regulator Controller use the parameters in this screen to setup Holidays One of the time of day profiles is for weekends Saturday and Sunday and holidays while the other is for weekdays You may specify up to 30 holiday dates month day and year Use the F2 Next and F3 Prev keys to display each set of Holiday Dates wid DO Mata Mate H ey lty Liiga System H Holiday hoes lo He a gf H dau 2 ear al od Frid lamor ial n ependo alar lay Ihksguein hksgue in chr ws maz Christmas christmas Wil T EEE christmas thr is hmas e Year ft tt tf ft tf Sala i Z 3 4 5 7 E 9 B l F 4 5 A 1 1 1 Figure 3 10 Holiday Dates Time of day load profiles are used in Adaptive control Mode A Weekday Profile has a lower load than a Weekend or Holiday Profile as typically less energy is consumed during the week while people are working Name of Holiday The name of the holiday Date of Holiday Date s on which the holiday occurs Notice certain holidays such as Christmas span multiple days After configuring a DR and pressing F8 Save use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display This saves the configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 Rev 9 99 3 15 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 4 COMM WITH DRS When using a L
96. Mode Then press the RBX Features pushbutton and configure the parameters in the dialog box see Figure 9 11 Refer to Section 9 5 2 RBX Features on page 9 13 for detailed information on each parameter Be sure to press F8 Save before exiting this screen Rev 9 99 9 17 GRIDLINK User Manual ward Path Address H1 Grou H1 Host Address Address HZ Grom HZ Host Group i Address H3 Grom H3 REH Alarm Index a ABI Alarm Index OKs LGancel ly Inactive Figure 9 11 Configuring the RBX Communication Parameters 9 6 4 Configuring Basic Alarming Parameters When using RBX Alarming you must ensure that the alarms are Enabled and configured for each point that you want to monitor through RBX Alarming Configure the alarm parameters such that an alarm occurs only when desired For example assume you want to monitor the meter differential pressure for RBX Alarming Select AI from the I O menu and with Point Number A1 displayed make sure that the Alarming parameter is set to Enabled Refer to Figure 9 12 9 18 File Heter 10 Data i i F tiliti Suzten Help Point Number A 1 Tag Diff Pres Value I Units Scan Period 1 Sees in j a a ila EENI i nanle IFEF En Low Reading El a l E isabled High Reading El 7 Alaras Alarn Advanced patines AT Calibratio Figure 9 12 Enabling Alarming Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Next press the Alarms pushbutton and ensure that the limits on the various alarms are set wh
97. Mode Help Program Filename CAFISHERAGRIDLINK Window Title GRIDLINK Optional Parameters Fl MFISHER OO Start up Directory C FISHER Video Memory Text Low Graphics High Graphics Memory Requirements KB Required KB Desired EMS Memory KB Required o KB Limit o XMS Memory KB Required KB Limit o Display Usage Full Screen Execution Background O Windowed O Exclusive q Close Window on Exit Press F1 for Help on Program Filename Figure 1 8 PIF Editor for Windows 3 1x 6 Enter the directory path where you installed GRIDLINK in the Start up Directory field For example if you installed GRIDLINK in the C F isher directory enter C Fisher in the Start up Directory field Refer to Figure 1 8 7 Select Save from the File menu 8 Select Exit from the File menu 1 6 8 Editing the GRIDLINK PIF in Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT If you installed GRIDLINK in another directory other than the default GRIDLINK directory you must edit the GRIDLINK PIF file to indicate in which directory GRIDLINK resides 1 Select highlight the GRIDLINK icon located in the Target Directory in which E Gridlink you installed GRIDLINK Rev 9 99 1 23 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 Right mouse click on the GRIDLINK EXE icon to display options as in Figure 1 9 Open Scan for Viruses Quick View Send To gt Cut Copy Create Shortcut Delete Rename P
98. OR Sew eee S G 4 Parameter Namie ici a da 1 8 Parameters meenet dan dir 5 2 Paci tyre oben vite a nae ethene An AE Dns 9 11 Part N mDeT aroe aa 9 6 PassWord it ad 8 2 8 4 Deal ia 1 28 8 1 Paste OEI A ae AON Be eS 1 11 Pasting Display Data oooonnnnnccnonccinocccnonononccnonacinnass 6 11 PGs ce crete tani e Gite Ron eto al ade es G 4 PC Baud Rate iia 2 6 PC Comm Parameters coccoconcccnnnnnnnnononcnonnnnnonanonicinnnnn 2 5 PC Comm PolTt ooooccnnnnnnnnnonocccnnnncnnnnnnnnnoncnnonoconnnnnnnanono 2 6 Rev 9 99 PCT Radio Power Control ccccccceceeeeeeesseeeees 7 5 Per Days secsassaseesihaiscgsias iendsiasi socio TATAA 7 6 AT 7 6 PerMincuati ate ad de ais Me odas 7 6 RCT A ET EE T 7 6 PI Accumulated Pulses occcccccnnnnnnoncnoninnnnnnnnnos 4 27 Active Alarms oooooooononnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 4 28 Advanced Features oocoononooooooooncnnnnnnnnnnnccnonnncnnnnnnns 4 30 Alarm Deadband ooonnnnnnnnnonononononononananoccnnononnnnnnnnos 4 29 ALAMOS eterno initial don aa 4 28 Alam Sennan nn aE iii 4 28 Conversio i ares a TE ETS 4 27 4 31 Current Rat ii ti RE 4 27 Delta Alarma rai 4 29 EU Optima 4 30 EU Vallenata 4 26 O class cineca tae 4 31 EU Horna rana aia 4 31 EU Mi iaa a 4 31 EUs P lseuinno inicias 4 31 High AlatMieatia le 4 29 High High Alarm ooooonnnccnnonnconnncnononcnnnnonancnnonacinne 4 29 Low Alarm ooooonnnncnnnnnnnnooncnnnnnnnnonanionocnnnonannnnanonos 4 28 Low Low
99. PC Comm Parameters Refer to Figure 2 4 Using this screen you may configure up to 40 communication setups per group The GridBoss Directory option allows you to change the communications port time out settings and other variables used by the GridBoss when establishing a connection to your personal computer You may also F4 Copy and F5 Paste similar configurations NOTE Your communications parameters must match the parameters setup on your personal computer Your personal computer s communication parameters are accessed through the computer s Control Panel Comm List Select a communications setup from the list Upon selecting a setup from the Comm List you can change the communication parameters or use the Connect pushbutton to establish communications with the associated GridBoss Notice that three default settings are available GridBoss LOI Deflt GridBoss COM Deflt Phone Modem Connect Establish a connection to the GridBoss using the setup currently selected in the Comm List After setting up your communications settings click Connect to establish a connection from the PC to the GridBoss Hangup Hangup is used to end a communications session with a modem Rev 9 99 2 5 GRIDLINK User Manual Tag The 20 character identifier describes the use of the configured parameters for the GridBoss Use a default name GridBoss LOI Deflt GridBoss COM1 Deflt or Phone Modem or create your own PC Baud Rate
100. PDB Daily History File extension DAY Rev 9 99 2 27 GRIDLINK User Manual When you select any of the previous options the Open File dialog box Figure 2 8 appears with a list of all applicable history files found in the default GRIDLINK directory These files must have been created either by using the Collect GridBoss Data function or by using the Save function while viewing a history log Select the desired log file Once a history file is selected a new screen appears as shown in Figure 2 25 Select a conversion file format There are four formats Tab delimited spreadsheet ASCII text Comma delimited spreadsheet ASCII text Space delimited spreadsheet ASCII text Intellution Format 15 minute or day history only Refer to Section 2 7 2 1 Viewing TOD Profiles on page 2 16 File Grid 10 Data Display History Utilities System Help Convert Gridfoess file RIG POBE to spreadshart format Select the Coluen Delimitar 1 Tak i i KLOR paca li J intel lution Formai Stari Conver ting y Cancel A Figure 2 25 Convert 2 28 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Select a format and press Start Converting A Save File dialog box appears refer to Figure 2 6 that lets you specify the File Name of the spreadsheet file and the intended location Use the DOS naming conventions when naming your files You may specify a file name with up to eight characters before the period and an extension wit
101. PP will not call the DR if the LPP would send a command that would force the DR beyond the limits The LPP calls the DR if the command will take the DR back into valid limits and away from the other limits If the LPP detects the DR is against the limits the LPP still calls at the Error Time Delay for DRs rate to keep up to date with events occurring at the DR The default value is 60 minutes 3 22 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Low Battery Voltage Limit The lowest voltage that the battery can fall before generating a low battery alarm to the DR Even if alarms are not enabled a low battery condition is communicated to the DRs The DR shifts from Adaptive or Outer Loop Mode to Inner Loop control Mode The default value is 11 volts Outlet Press Point Fail Low Limit The lowest pressure that the Low Press Value can reach before generating an alarm to the DR Set this value to just below the EU that corresponds to the lowest valid pressure of the pressure transmitter Even if alarms are not enabled a bad pressure condition is communicated to the DRs The DR shifts from Adaptive or Outer Loop Mode to Inner Loop control Mode The default value is 0 Outlet Press Point Fail High Limit The highest pressure that the Low Press Value can reach before generating an alarm to the DR Set this value to just above the highest pressure of the pressure transmitter Even if alarms are not enabled a bad pressure condition is communicated to the DRs
102. RIDLIHE Directors lr ove SA AA pb eee RES l K m E A 1 a a Ltancall 5 Figure 2 6 Save File Dialog Rev 9 99 2 414 GRIDLINK User Manual After entering the File Name and pressing OK the new file is created At this point the new file is open and you may proceed to the appropriate menu items to configure off line The File Name displays on the Status Line at the bottom of the screen to indicate the file being used Note that you see default values such as found in a previously un configured GridBoss in the off line configuration screens 2 5 1 DR District Regulator Configuration Use the DR Configuration option to create a new configuration file for the District Regulator Controller while off line Off line configuration files are useful as you can create the files in your office and you can use the files for DRs that have the same basic configuration The DR computes load profiles based on ambient temperature and time of day to determine the predicted Setpoint of the regulator The RTD reads the ambient temperature The GridBoss uses the Sensor Module SM to acquire the inlet and outlet pressure from the District Regulator 2 5 2 LPP Low Pressure Point Configuration Use the LPP Configuration option to create a new configuration file for the Low Pressure Point GridBoss 602 while off line Off line configuration files are useful as you can create the files in your office and you can use the files for LPPs that
103. S 9 12 Modes Selecting the Typ8 ooooonoccnnocccnonccononcnonocanccnanacinnacano 3 6 Monitor iia dina 6 14 Analog p ti essas ira vn 6 16 Analog Outputs ean R E E 6 17 Control Loop ear a EE E EE 6 19 Discrete Tnp tssnnisn demararea na 6 14 Discrete O tp t secaraa eei a 6 15 LPP Inter LO0p ann n E RESEN 6 19 Outer LOOp ahaireen ee ao E a 6 19 Pulse inputs ici sccc inion 6 18 Monitors Black and Whit8 oooooccconccconcccnocccnonncnoncconnanonnncnn 1 35 Monochrome Displays ooooonocccnoccconancnonncnonccconaconnnos 1 35 MONTH ius oa ia 7 5 MONVAE tacita 7 5 MUS e o e a ane 1 8 1 11 OS G 3 MPU Loading tarea 9 6 MPULOD cuotas 7 5 aa AVA ANAE A T AE TE E ENE E ets G 3 O E E E N G 3 N Name of Holiday sissies oin e ieta 3 15 NEC aee oea o a a o Eo Ee seb esate G 3 NEMA ina it G 3 New Display reiini atine ee cisne sobe dilo idos 6 1 Example anta td 6 4 NeWisa ua As 2 11 Next E tao a ETA O a 1 10 No RESPONSE viii bh ae ade 2 3 2 7 Number of Completed CallS ooonnccnnnnninccnonccnnnccnnne 3 18 O OIE CUM it EEEE EREE EEEE EEE rE 5 10 A heeele sist eaea ne n E T Enea es 3 6 IA a S Ee ETN EENEN i eaoh 5 8 5 9 OFFEN E od ads 7 5 a G 3 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Oe a e teta es title te Me tte tetas cdt G 3 OIT aE no e O G 3 On Alarm Cleat ooooocccccccnnnnnnoo 3 4 3 8 3 20 4 5 4 14 o tn tl os 4 18 4 29 9 19 On Alarm S t oooooonnncnnnnnnnononononns 3 4 3 8 3 20 4 5 4 14 o o ela 4 18 4 29 9 19
104. Security on LOI Security for the operator interface port LOD of a connected GridBoss can be turned ON or OFF for all users by selecting either the Disabled or Enabled option accordingly By default Security on LOI is Enabled Security on COM1 Security for the host port COM1 of a connected GridBoss can be turned ON or OFF for all users by selecting either the Disabled or Enabled option accordingly By default Security on COM is Disabled Remember to use the F8 Save pushbutton to retain your changes in configuration memory 8 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 3 MACROS Select Utilities from the menu bar and then choose Macros Use macros to record a series of keystrokes mouse actions are ignored that you perform You can then replay the sequence on demand by using a hot key that you assign before recording the sequence Refer to Section 8 3 4 Example Macro on page 8 7 The macro options are Record Macro Play Macro Stop Recording 8 3 1 Record Macro In the Macros submenu choose Record Macro A dialog box appears for specifying the Macro File Name and the hot key keystrokes required to run the macro Refer to Figure 8 3 Define macro key and its file name Macro Key Ctrl Al y Macro File Name macroi mac Figure 8 3 Record Macro NOTE Macros can typically be used only with the same GridBoss for which they were created unless the units are identical For example if there
105. Station Name Address Group Phone from LPP Phone from Host Host from Station LPP1 1 2 N A 9 555 0001 555 1000 DRI 2 2 555 0002 9 555 0002 555 1000 DR2 3 2 555 0003 9 555 0003 555 1000 LPP2 1 3 N A 9 1 515 555 0004 1 515 555 1000 DR3 2 3 555 0005 9 1 515 555 0005 1 515 555 1000 Table 9 1 can be used to configure the Host using the GridBoss Station Name Address Group and Phone from Host information Contract Hour The time when values are totaled for a single day of production accumulators are cleared and data is logged to the Daily History database The Contract Hour is based on a 24 hour clock with midnight as the 0 hour Units Select either US English Imperial units or Metric units Force End of Day Pressing the Clear pushbutton causes the current day and its values to be logged into memory for all historical data It also resets the daily and 15 minute accumulators Force End of Day uses one of the 35 possible slots for storing daily and 15 minute data Firmware Info Refer to page 9 5 Revision Info Refer to page 9 6 9 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Press F8 Save to save any changes you have made Press F1 Update to update the current screen to display the new changes Press F6 Cancel to cancel any changes Press Advanced Features to display advanced System Information features NOTE Most of the values that can be edited in this display are saved to progr
106. System menu contains options for setting the real time clock for viewing system information for setting System Flags and for configuring communications ports This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number Information 9 3 9 3 Firmware Information 9 3 1 9 5 ES o TQ n P P Report by Exception 9 16 RBX Configuration Overview 9 6 1 9 16 erifying Host Communications 9 7 1 9 21 Rev 9 99 9 1 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 2 CLOCK The internal real time clock provides time stamping and control of the historical databases Event Log and Alarm Log To set the clock select the Clock option from the System menu The GRIDLINK software responds with the display shown in Figure 9 1 NOTE Make sure that the clock is correctly set before placing the GridBoss into service and beginning to log values events and alarms GridBoss Clock 03 18 99 10 14 48 Honth 3 Hour 10 Day 18 Minute 14 Year 2099 Seconds 44 Set Cancel Figure 9 1 Clock Display The time values in the display are updated approximately every second To set the clock proceed as follows 1 Select Clock from the GRIDLINK System menu 2 Use the cursor or the TAB key to highlight the value to be changed Type in the desired value In addition to the Seconds Minutes Hour Day Month and Year 3 Press Set to save the current setting or Cancel to cancel the changes Keep in mind that this update re
107. T Soft Point DRC Regulator Control STATUS Status or Loop Status SYS System Variables EU Engineering Unit Value or Filtered EU TAG Tag FLG GridBoss System Flags TCOEFF Coefficient of Temperature FST Function Sequence Table Registers TDYRAW Pulses Today TDYTOT Today s Total HOUR Hours TMPVAL Temperature Value INTFLG Integer Flag VRXCTR Valid Receive Counter LPC Low Pressure Control YDYTOT Yesterday s Total LPP DR Communications to LPP YEAR Year LPPVAL Average LPP Value LPVAL Low Pressure Value Rev 9 99 7 5 GRIDLINK User Manual Finally in the right most scrollable list choose the specific parameter to log Select Archive Type Choose one of the options listed to specify the exact archive type of the history point The archive type affects how the logged value is calculated included are some special purpose types for FST control refer to the FST User Manual especially the WDB and WTM commands Disabled Point not configured Average Minute values are averaged to compute the hourly value The inputs such as Differential Pressure allow you to select among four types of averaging for calculating flow quantities or for providing values See the Select Average Type parameter below Accumulate Accumulate is not used in the GridBoss System Current Value Current sampled value is used for the hourly value Totalize The difference between the current value and last hour s current value is used for
108. T and FST point had been performed before the Cold Start the saved FST will be reloaded in place of the one that was cleared If an FST was running when the FST was saved the FST will likewise be running when the FST is reloaded by the cold start Note that FST registers are always cleared upon restart therefore use softpoints to load initial values for the FST Cold Start Options None Restore config from flash defaults Restore config and clear alarm event logs Restore config and clear FSTs Restore config and clear history Restore config and clear all of above OK 5 Cancel 3 Figure 9 6 Cold Start Options Clear Internal Config Memory When the pushbutton for Clear Internal Configuration Memory is Yes all saved restart configuration data contained in programmable ROM will be cleared upon saving only factory defaults are retained When the memory is cleared the pushbutton reverts to No 9 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Write to Internal Config Memory When the pushbutton for Write to Internal Configuration Memory is Yes most configuration settings including the current states of the GridBoss Flags and calibration values FST is also saved are loaded into programmable ROM as the new restart configuration See the Cold Start parameter for more information When the loading is complete the Internal Config Memory Write Status indicator on the next line of the display sh
109. The last control Mode in which the DR was operating Manual Inner Loop Outer Loop Adaptive Last DR PID Calc Status Displays if the DR control loop calculation was Enabled or Disabled Rev 9 99 3 19 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 4 2 RBX Alarm Option The RBX Alarm Options dialog enables you to set the RBX alarming options When set the LPP generates an RBX alarm to the Host when communication alarms occur between the LPP and the DR RBX Alarm Options on DR_Comm Alarms On Alarm Set amp Clear Figure 3 13 RBX Alarm Options RBX on DR Comm Alarms Set the appropriate type of Report by Exception RBX alarm for the District Regulator communications alarm Disabled Select Disabled to turn this option OFF On Alarm Set When the DR communication point enters an alarm condition the LPP Controller generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Clear When the DR communication point leaves an alarm condition the LPP Controller generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Set Clear In either condition a Report by Exception message generates Note that RBX alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured for the Host Select Disabled if you do not want RBX alarming to be active for this point 3 20 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 5 LOW PRESSURE CONTROL When using a Low Pressure Point Controller use the parameters in this
110. These controllers also perform PID loop control data archival and remote communications The GridBoss System uses two types of controller units the GB601 District Regulator DR and the GB602 Low Pressure Point LPP Controller The DR controller is automated with an actuator such as the Fisher Type 662 Kixcel An I P or servo valve may be used in place of the Kixcel The GB601 provides functions required for measuring the inlet and outlet pressure of the District Regulator and the GB602 measures the line pressure at the Low Pressure Point NOTE An I P or servo valve may be used in place of the Kixcel For ease of readability Kixcel is used throughout this manual to represent all three devices The GridBoss System builds load profiles based on ambient temperature and time of day which are then used to determine the predicted Setpoint of the District Regulator The GridBoss System provides on site functionality and supports remote monitoring pressure measurement data archival communications and control The GridBoss System design also allows you to configure specific applications including those requiring calculations logic and sequencing control by using Function Sequence Tables FSTs The primary function of the GridBoss system is to control a Setpoint for a District Regulator which allows the District Regulator to automate the delivering of natural gas at an optimized and adequate pressure By using history load profiles or
111. Wald ocoooccnonccconcccnonncionnconncnonanconacononcnn 9 15 SVA Signal Value Analog cocoooncccnonnnocccnononancnns 5 4 5 5 SVD Signal Value Discrete ooonocccnocncocccconanonnno 5 4 5 5 SYS iaa 7 5 System Information Firmware InformatiON oooonnonnnccnnononcncnoncconanccinnnos 9 5 System Mei coincida desd 9 1 CIOCK iii ll ed te lis 9 2 Comm Ports ic isis oaccui ceed seth cobs dea casas ete inicio iaa 9 10 O 9 7 Information na ida 9 3 System Requirements ooooccooccnoncconnnncnnnnonanonanccinnccnnne 1 15 T Taba looi op o lads 1 14 Tab Delimited Spreadsheet oooononnnnnccnoncconncnonccinnnaos 2 28 Table 1 1 List Box Key Functions ooooooccnoncccnnonncos 1 14 Table 4 1 Input and Output Point Number 4 32 Table 5 1 Typical Power Control and Host Configuration O T 5 10 Table 7 1 DR Default History Points eee 7 3 Table 7 2 LPP Default History Points 7 3 Table 7 3 GridBoss Point Types oooooonocccnonccnonccconnnonns 7 5 Table 8 1 GRIDLINK Security Levels eee 8 3 Table 9 1 System Information Example 4 9 4 Table Number cal 5 12 TA ds 2 6 3 5 3 21 5 3 5 6 5 8 TAG La o E el cido 7 5 TEOERE a a tl al ek 7 5 TDI Scan Pd na 4 16 IDO a A A A a nek G 5 0 COM taa 4 23 100 EMM A 4 23 Excl sTimes tor ados a debido de de bl 4 23 EU Vallina dll 4 23 High Reading EU spiria ae a ata 4 23 Low Reading EU cee ntas 4 23 Rev 9 99 Parameters iii E R aS 4 23 Topp
112. With the desired file highlighted press OK The file begins loading with the Status Line showing the progress in four categories Segment Address Block Size and Total Sent The loading process may take several minutes depending on the firmware 2 24 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual When loading is complete the GridBoss re reads its configuration and records the actions in the Event Log While the memory is being modified the I O is not read but is held at the last values When installation is complete press Enter 2 10 UPDATE HARDWARE Use Update Hardware under the File menu to make a major modification to the hardware of the GridBoss such as replacing the motherboard replacing the flash chip replacing the entire GridBoss unit or any other modification in which you are concerned that configuration will be lost After selecting the Update Hardware option backup files are created containing the GridBoss configuration calibration communications settings GridBoss flags and FSTs Alarms events and history cannot be loaded back into the unit if you require the information be sure to save the logs to a file before proceeding Refer to Section 2 7 Collect GridBoss Data on page 2 14 After backing up the information you are prompted to power down the unit make the hardware changes power the unit back up and then press Enter At that time the backup information is loaded into the GridBoss When loading of the files is
113. access to the Utilities menu but allow various levels of access to other options Level 5 and Level 6 allow access to all menus and functions Refer to Table 8 1 Remember to press F8 Save to retain your changes 8 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Table 8 1 GRIDLINK Security Levels File Direct Connect GridBoss Directory Quick Setup New DR LPP Open Event File Alarm File Minute History File 15 Minute History Daily History File Config Collect GridBoss Data All TOD Profiles History Events Alarms Download GridBoss Config to Disk Disk Config to GridBoss TOD Profiles Update Firmware Update Hardware Convert Minute History File 15 Minute History File Daily History File Print Configuration GRIDLINK Security Macros Record Macro Play Macro Stop Recording Exit GRID Comm with LPP Regulator Control Holiday Dates Comm with DR Low Press Control 1 0 Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Pulse Inputs Data FST Hogister Editor Soft Points Radio Control Opcode Setup User List Display New Display Display on Disk Monitor Discrete Input Discrete Output Analog Inpu Analog Output Pulse Input Control Loop History Setup Min Max Minute 15 Minute Day Events Alarms Utilities Security GRIDLINK Operator GridBoss Logon Macros Recor
114. ain in that state until it is cleared To be cleared the Status parameter must be changed to the OFF state either by software or by you If the DI has the Input Inverted field set the field input is inverted in the Status field ON becomes OFF and vice versa 4 16 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Scanning These options let you enable or disable scanning for this point For the input to receive and process the field input it must be Enabled While Scanning is Enabled the Status field indicates the input state ON or OFF When Scanning is Disabled Manual Mode the Status becomes a control for determining the state of the input to the GridBoss overriding the field input and effectively placing the input into Manual Mode If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Alarming These options let you enable or disable Alarming for this point If you enable alarms the alarms are configured and display in the Alarms dialog box Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log To optimize processor time alarms should be Enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration Two types of alarms are possible The Manual Mode alarm is generated if the DI is placed into Manual Mode Scanning Disabled The Status Change alarm occurs if the DI changes from OFF to ON in the Status Alarms Refer to page 4 17 Advanced Features Refer to page 4 18
115. ains the following information Information Section Page Number reating a Display Example 6 2 2 6 Display On Disk 6 2 3 6 1 1 1 1 _ D Nn onitor Analog Input 6 3 3 6 onitor Analog Output 6 3 4 6 onitor Pulse Input 6 3 5 6 18 ontrol Loop 6 3 6 6 19 DD 6 2 CUSTOM DISPLAYS The Display menu options provide choices for building new displays or for loading running and editing displays stored on disk 6 2 1 New Display Selecting Display from the menu bar and then choosing New Display allows you to create or edit displays as well as run the displays with live data The displays can incorporate almost any information you wish to convey One example is a graphical representation of the application that a GridBoss is monitoring and controlling Another example is a display that monitors the GridBoss and adjusts commonly used parameters from a single screen Refer to Figure 6 1 Rev 9 99 6 1 GRIDLINK User Manual NOTE Press Edit to create or edit the screen display File Grid DU Mata Misolow WHistoru Utilities System Help Analog Inputs i Analog Irouts Paint Tag 143 1 0 Point Tag 13 2 0 li 13 1 7 Hi El e A Lor EU 43 1 6 Luis EU 49 2 6 Filtered Ells 43 1 3 Filtered Els 49 2 3 Alarm 43 1 16 Alarm 13 2 16 Character Sat ABEDEFRCE H TOICGCLAM MDOP ODORSTO UVC a OK OY et abcde Ff g bh ad jg k 1 nnopbarsd uv oe Oo oz
116. am mable memory when Write to Internal Config Memory is activated from the GridBoss Flags display Refer to Section 9 4 9 3 1 Firmware Information To set additional System Information variables select Information from the System menu When you are at the System Information screen shown in Figure 9 2 use the Advanced Features pushbutton A dialog box appears that displays the number of other device specific parameters such as the version serial number history points and installed RAM Refer to Figure 9 3 Firmware Info History Points 15 Customer Name NONE Version Name W68082K0012 Ver0 00A Fisher ID Fisher FAS Time Created Feb 16 1999 11 00 ROM Serial MPU Loading 20 83333 Figure 9 3 Firmware Information History Points The number of database points contained in the Base RAM area This field accepts a value from 0 to 15 points The default value is 15 Customer Name The name of the customer for which the ROM version was created The customer name can be set at the factory at the time of ordering or in the field by a Fisher representative Version Name Displays the part number and version of the installed firmware Fisher ID Identifies the creator of the firmware Rev 9 99 9 5 GRIDLINK User Manual Time Created Date and time when the installed firmware was created ROM Serial The serial number assigned by the factory to the read only memory ROM installed in the GridB
117. ame A 20 character name or location of the GridBoss The name is logged with the historical database for easy site identification Each GridBoss should have a unique Station Name Refer to Table 9 1 GridBoss Type Identifies the type of GridBoss currently active DR is District Regulator and LPP is Low Pressure Point Rev 9 99 9 3 GRIDLINK User Manual Address Identifies this specific individual GridBoss controller for communication purposes typically to a Host such as GridManager that polls the GridBoss The Address can be assigned a value from 1 to 247 240 is the system default Address and should not be used 200 is the default for an LPP Controller The Address of each GridBoss should be a unique number to differentiate between all units in a communications system Refer to Table 9 1 When a Host asks a specific GridBoss controller for information the Host searches the network for the GridBoss with that specific Address The Host searches the Address field of every GridBoss on the network until it finds a match Group Identifies a set of GridBoss controllers for communication purposes typically to a Host that polls the GridBoss The station Group can be assigned a value from 1 to 247 All of the GridBoss controllers addressed as an area in the Host have the same station Group 240 is the system default Group and should not be used Refer to Table 9 1 Table 9 1 System Information Example
118. are eee 2 27 Figure 2 25 Convert sisareni a aN a 2 28 Figure 2 26 Print Configuration for GridBoss 601 District Regulator ooooonoccnnnnonncccnnancnoncnnnncnnnnass 2 29 Figure 3 1 Comm with the LPP oo noononccnnncccnc 3 2 Figure 3 2 RBX Alarm Options sssr 3 4 Figure 3 3 Comm with LPP Regulator Control dani 3 5 Figure 3 4 Alarm Options 3 8 Figure 3 5 I O Definition oooonocccnnconncncnnannnnnnonananos 3 9 Figure 3 6 I O Point Definition for Discrete Output iia raices ones adn d cae 3 9 Figure 3 7 I O Poll oonoconoconannnaononornnonnonnonennaron nos 3 9 Figure 3 8 TUNIN8 ooocnonononncnonncconanoncnnnnccnnnnccnnne 3 10 Figure 3 9 Adaptive 3 13 Figure 3 10 Holiday Dates 3 15 Figure 3 11 Comm with DR 3 16 Figure 3 12 DR Control Status eee 3 19 Figure 3 13 RBX Alarm Options eee 3 20 Figure 3 14 Low Pressure Control ooooocccnncccn 3 21 Figure 4 1 Analog Inputs oooonooccononcccconcncnnonncccnnnos 4 2 Figure 4 2 Analog Input Alarms c ceee 4 4 Figure 4 3 Analog Inputs Advanced Features 4 6 Figure 4 4 Al Calibration cece eeseeneeeeeeees 4 7 Figure 4 5 Verify AI Calibration eee 4 8 Figure 4 6 AI Set ZeTO ooocooccconcconncconcnonanonnnnncnananos 4 8 Figure 4 7 AI Set Span ooconccconcconncnoncnonnnonancninananos 4 9 Figure 4 8 AI Set Midpoint 1 oo eee eeeeeeeeees 4 9 Figure 4 9 AI Set Midpoint 2 00 0 cee eeeeeeeeeeee
119. arm currently activated For example Low Low might appear to indicate that value of a PI is below the LoLo Alarm limit Even if you do not set all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so false alarms do not generate Alarms Refer to page 4 28 Advanced Features Refer to page 4 30 After configuring a point press F8 Save and use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display to save I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 4 6 1 Pulse Input Alarms When you press the Alarms pushbutton in the Pulse Inputs screen shown in Figure 4 19 a dialog box appears that lets you configure the alarms for this pulse input For all pulse inputs you can configure RBX Alarming and view Active Alarms A Manual Mode alarm is set in the Alarm Log when the PI is placed into Manual Mode Scanning Disabled Refer to Figure 4 20 Allarms Low Alarm 0 RBX Alarming High Alarm ge Disabled Lolo Alarm On Alarm Set Cancel HiHi Alarm C 3 0n Alarm Clear ua Rate Alarm C On Alarm Set amp Clear Alarm Deadband Figure 4 20 Pulse Input Alarms Low Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the input must fall to generate a low alarm The alarm is generated if the Value is less than or equal to the Low Alarm input for the PI The default value is 10 4 28 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual High Alarm The limit value in engine
120. arm value must be set greater than the Span of the analog input The default value is 5 Alarm Deadband The value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The purpose of the Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data The default value is 2 RBX Alarming RBX Alarming allows you to send a Report by Exception alarm to the Host when the point alarm condition is met Refer to Section 9 Configuring RBX Alarming Disabled Select Disabled under RBX Alarming to turn this option OFF On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Set Clear In either condition a Report by Exception message generates Note that RBX Alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured Select Disabled if you do not want RBX Alarming to be active for this point After configuring a point and pressing F8 Save use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display This will save I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9
121. arms should be set slightly beyond the range of the transducers If a pressure transducer electrically shorts or opens the signal goes beyond the 4 to 20mA range and triggers the RBX alarms Output Deviation Deadband Analog Output Type only A window around the Control Output When the Control Output and Output Feedback are within this window from each other alarming on Output Deviation is disabled For example if you enter 5 there will be a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the Control Output in which the Output Feedback can move without causing an alarm The default value is 5 3 12 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 2 4 Adaptive When using a District Regulator Controller use the parameters in this screen to setup the Adaptive Gain configuration required for using the Adaptive Mode control Adaptive Clear Profiles TOD Profiles Disabled Unlocked Ambient Temp Adaptive Gain Temp Coefficient Temp Point Fail Low Limit Temp Point Fail High Limit Adaptive Error 6 0000000 Predicted Adaptive Value 0 0000000 Current TOD Value 0 0000000 Figure 3 9 Adaptive Clear Profiles Historical time of day load profiles can be cleared if this parameter is Enabled If the time of day profiles have been cleared then the DR creates new time of day profiles When in Outer Loop Mode the time of day profiles are calculated based on the running average of the calculated change in Setpoint and the current time
122. aved during this off line configuration they are saved to a GridBoss configuration file with the extension GF C in the default GRIDLINK directory unless you specify otherwise Once the file is created it automatically becomes active and you may edit the file The configuration file may also be loaded into a GridBoss later using the Disk Config to GridBoss function Refer to Load Disk Configuration to GridBoss on page 2 21 Configuration of a GridBoss system can be performed off line or on line The advantage of off line configuration is the ability to perform most of the configuration without connecting to the GridBoss This is especially an advantage if you are modifying the configuration of an operating GridBoss since 1t can minimize down time Off line configuration is performed by taking an existing configuration file opening it and making the desired changes It is recommended that the DR and LPP configuration information along with the communications parameters such as Baud Rate be configured before the units are deployed in the field Each unit should be marked or labeled This allows further configuration from a central location The Sensor Module transducer calibrations should be recorded and if known should be configured before the units are deployed It is also useful to synchronize the Date and Time in each unit Enter the name of the new configuration in the File Name field Refer to Figure 2 6 Saua File 1 File Name Dh LCF C WE
123. aw FU 13 1 6 Low El 43 1 6 Filtered Ells 13 1 3 Filtered EUs 43 1 3 Lara H3 1 16 Alarm 83 1 16 z Character Sel ABtoORhBE F BHI SEL WH OP BSTUY HW HY fF E JE A rrtt ria Preu Saik Hent Ea rane 5 gt O Cira Figure 6 18 Pasting Custom Display Data You can now change the live data values to display other points Make minor alterations to the data you copied to create the custom display shown in Figure 6 19 You can type over existing characters by using the Insert key on your keyboard to make OVR for overstrike appear next to the Character Set pushbutton If you press the Insert key again the display toggles to INS for insert characters To change live data values that you have copied place your cursor in front of the live data field Click and drag to select the live data field 5 Highlight the live data values and press Shift to view the value description window and make changes Refer to Figure 6 14 6 Select the new point or other data you desire to include in your custom display This example uses Analog Input AIN A 2 7 Press OK 8 Complete changes to the rest of the fields as necessary Refer to Figure 6 19 In the right hand column of this example Analog Input has been copied to the other Analog Inputs location and the data values have been altered to reflect second Al data Save the display and then press Cancel Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual File Grad MO Dsta
124. ay load profiles from a disk file into GB601 user memory Select TOD Profiles from the File menu s Download option When you select TOD Profiles a display appears that allows you to download a Weekday Profile a Weekend Holiday Profile or both Refer to Figure 2 18 2 22 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Download Time of Day Profiles File Name 0 TOD Weekday Profile Weekend Holiday Profile F6 Cancel F8 Download Figure 2 18 TOD Profiles Time of day load profiles are used in the Adaptive control mode A Weekday Profile has a lower load than a Weekend or Holiday Profile as less energy is consumed during the week while people are working Weekday Profile Downloads time of day weekday profile Weekend Holiday Profile Downloads time of day weekend and associated holiday load profile 2 9 UPDATE FIRMWARE Use the Update Firmware option located under the File menu to update the internal software Only the Flash ROM is upgraded during this procedure This option does not update the GRIDLINK software but clears the Event Log and Alarm Log Save the Event Log and Alarm Log to a file before proceeding refer either to Save GridBoss Configuration to Disk on page 2 20 or to Event and Alarm History in Section 7 You receive the updated firmware files on a disk To install the file and update your firmware 1 Create a backup copy of the GRIDLINK Update Firmware disk as explained previously 2 Perform a full backup
125. before proceeding refer to Save GridBoss Configuration to Disk on page 2 20 3 Insert the Update Firmware disk in the 3 5 inch floppy drive 4 Read the README file included on the Update Firmware disk 5 Select Update Firmware from the File menu The New or Existing Backup dialog box appears for specifying whether to create a new backup or use an existing file Rev 9 99 2 23 GRIDLINK User Manual Do you wish to create a new backup or use an existing backup Figure 2 19 New or Existing Backup 6 Click New or Existing When you create a New backup the GridBoss reinstalls the current configuration of the device after the hardware is installed If you choose Existing backup the GridBoss reinstalls the configuration based on the last backup you created and does not return the GridBoss to its current state The Open File dialog box appears for specifying a File Name to download Refer to Figure 2 20 The Open File dialog displays the names of all files with the BIN extension located in the default directory File Nane C 6RIDLIMK Files Directory Drive DR BIN Figure 2 20 Update Firmware Open File Dialog 7 Navigate to the floppy disk drive location where the Update Firmware file is located You can change the path to the directory containing the file using the Directory Drive field 8 Select the desired file from the Files list which is the file on the floppy disk The file has a BIN extension
126. box which is obtained by using the Alarms pushbutton Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log To optimize processor time alarms should be Enabled only when necessary If you disable Alarming no limit alarms generate for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration Rev 9 99 4 3 GRIDLINK User Manual Active Alarms This field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled AI Alarms Refer to page 4 4 Advanced Features Refer to page 4 6 AI Calibration Refer to page 4 7 After configuring a point and pressing F8 Save use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display to save I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 4 2 1 Al Alarms When you use the Alarms pushbutton in the Analog Inputs screen shown in Figure 4 1 a dialog box appears that lets you configure the alarms for this analog input Refer to Figure 4 2 AT arms Low Alarm D RBX Alarming High Alarm He Disabled LoLo Alarm On Alarm Set Cancel HiHi Alarm C On Alarm Clear emar Rate Alarm C On Alarm Set amp Clear Alarm Deadband Figure 4 2 Analog Input Alarms Even if you d
127. cnoncconccnonononccnnacinnos 8 6 Manual Mode s es 3 6 4 3 4 16 4 21 4 22 Manual Tracki giair ateei iaeei eiie 3 12 EIEEE E PE EEE E EET TETT 1 4 Maximum Outputs rnision iensidich 3 12 Maximum Setpoint oooconocononcccnonnconnncnoncnonccnonac nnaninnos 3 11 MCU ivi io aida od G 3 MOT Y v5 ice scavieted ca saute fos lzcns fact estee ces tebscesieesauusst settee 8 8 Write to Internal Conf18 oococcconccnoncconncnoncnonnninnnnn 9 9 MU EIE ET ds dde iris 1 8 Menu Batic O NN 1 8 Menu Bar and Menus cccssceceeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeees 1 8 Mentir rata 1 13 Menus Dita 5 1 DISPLAY RO a 6 1 Ele a o bo ol dead de 2 1 Hel pid unk nied kt teeta aie wena eee 10 1 HIStory oe 228 ented tee tek ee ee ki 7 1 VOD a ok ee eed oh Se eho tate to 4 1 SYSTE chi Ae toni ee tients 9 1 Utilities A eens 8 1 Message 1 and Message 2 oeseri 5 5 Meter Bactor arin antec cent E E R 4 27 E 9 4 MIN A O TO 7 5 M n MaX ssaniu a aiia 7 7 Min Max Database oooocooccocncnonnnonccnonacancnnonannncnonaccnnnos 7 2 Minimum Output eee eeeeecseeceseeseeeseeeseeesneers 3 12 Minimum Setpoint cee eeececseccsseceseeeessneeseeeeeee 3 11 Minute ccoo laica eal eateries 7 9 Miriuit History silla 2 27 Minute History File IMDB critica 2 12 Minutes ieri tc atadn aldo aldeas 5 9 Misc Integers carol lcada had 5 4 5 5 Mode teneis iii 2 8 3 6 Modem StatlUS oconocccnooncnonononccnonccnnncnonccconancnnaconnnccnns 9 13 Modem Type samurain ain a
128. computed per second per minute per hour or per day 7 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 7 3 MIN MAX HISTORY Select History from the menu bar and then choose Min Max The Min Max database option displays the minimum and maximum values for history points logged in the GridBoss over a 24 hour period The minimum and maximum values are determined and stored at the end of each day based on the Contract Hour Refer to Figure 7 3 File Gr L Dat Lap ll ftilitia inf Han History ridHoss dress eau beroup ridboss Low Pre Po Time Downloaded 64 26 99 15 48 33 Operator REC PID Contrl OF 1 IR 2 Da 3 OR OR S LEAL AYE CALLS CUR CALLS CUR CALLS CUR CALLS CUA CALLS Cur Cor Value B 00060 DR BBR fe A OOOO O AO Hin Value A 0000004 0 0409000 0UB4 dO Y OOMRORR 4 AORRAOA biwiwik M s Value 4 00000 A 04600606 BBA 4 RR 1 BRR O OUBDOn Hin lime B u 4 Wu BB du 5 0 8 0 0 0 H 8 8 6 80 68 0 0 0 RR Hex lime 0 0 aa H H D 0 0 0 H H 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 8 8 6 06 68 0 0 0 HH Yesterday s Hin Value 4 4000004 BB 2620808 8 BAA 0 2 A ORO O AD Has Value A 4040005 A POROROR 8 BROADER F 6B O AD Hin Time 0 0 i i j H A 0 8 0 04 08 Hox Time 0 0 9 0 00 0 0 4 Ea n Figure 7 3 Min Max History 7 3 1 History Point Headers The top of each History table Min Max Minute Hour Day Alarm and Event displays a header identifying the GridBoss from which the information is being acquired Table Name The
129. cord MacOS at ees 8 5 Repite tt il ee lsd nis Meh oh ea aha 5 3 REGISTER ui 7 5 Register 1 to HlO oooooonononocconancnoncnnononononnanonncnnnanenonnn 5 3 Report by Exception See RBA ts 9 16 Requirements SYSTEM ais 1 15 Result RES rnnr aa e ees Berea cies 5 4 Retain Last Statusni mentene e e e iA 4 24 Retail On ed 2 8 Retry Co ts urnati 9 14 Revision NfO enn na a ERE Na 9 6 l 10 l EA El EAEE T tte de e od G 4 A T A E AE OS G 4 ROC Protocol User Manual csssssseseseeeeeees 1 4 ROC FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual 1 4 Rollover Value BUS ooooococcccococoooooooooononononononononononos 4 31 RO Mitra neon Roe santi dd Tn 1 6 G 4 ROMS ta aaa 9 6 RTD es ct steed cose teers G 4 RES O ti eer G 4 l ea DAE EA aes tects eset tte G 4 S SAC dd a ld o SA G 4 SAMA e e ad G 4 Save E Aci oi aoa anaes 1 11 AVG Piles o vies 2 11 Save GridBoss Configuration to Disk o 2 20 Save Values sisina tuihin i 6 13 SCADA r E E T G 4 Scale Factof senenta r des teca 3 11 3 17 SCAN ina 7 5 Scanning Starting and Stopping All oooonnccnnoncnoccccnncnonccnnnnnos 9 9 Screen Colors iere 1 33 SCLOOMS iii iii 1 12 SEG mnra i diet ai hed RA 7 5 O O O 5 9 A onena a iene 2 30 8 1 CA teste teetavede cloves E ia 8 4 Te PAU Ei es sds ei 1 28 8 1 GRIDLINK Operator ccoooocccnnoncncnononannnoncnnnconananin no 8 2 EOL aa fork ees Aes best da ees 8 4 Select Archive Typene eei ao ist 7 6 Select H
130. d Macro Play Macro Stop Recording GridBoss Memory Calibration Valles System Clock Information Flags Comm Ports Help Getting Started Keys Help Contents About Low Security High Security DR Units Only LPP Units Only Rev 9 99 8 3 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 2 2 GridBoss Logon Select the GridBoss Logon option under Security in the Utilities menu to control which GRIDLINK users are allowed access to a connected GridBoss In the screen that appears you can specify the Operator ID Password and which port to secure for up to 16 different users Refer to Figure 8 2 mirid oss Security Operator ID Passmord ecuri iy on LI F Phat Disabled 2 H La Enabled i i 4 ecur jte on COM a it isabled li l Enable f B 5 H 3 H 18 H 11 H 12 H 13 A 1a 15 i 16 ih ml a ad alej We iCancely Eiin Figure 8 2 GridBoss Access Security Operator ID The Operator ID three characters and Password four numbers must match one of the entries in the GRIDLINK Security screen If the GridBoss security is Enabled for the port through which you are trying to connect and a matching Operator ID and Password are not found you will not be allowed to connect to the GridBoss although you still have access to off line GRIDLINK functions File and Help menus Password The Password should be four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999
131. days EU Min Calculation based on EU minute totals EU Hour Calculation based on EU hourly totals EU Day Calculation based on EU day totals Conversion Specifies how the number entered in the Conversion field on the main PI screen is used EUs Pulse The specified number of engineering units typically fractional parts such as 0 01 are registered for each pulse Pulses EU This is the inverse of EUs Pulse Here the specified number of pulses such as 100 is counted to register as one engineering unit Rev 9 99 4 31 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 7 INPUT AND OUTPUT POINT NUMBERS Table 4 1 lists the point numbers associated with all input and outputs and where they are physically located Table 4 1 Input and Output Point Numbers Analog Input Analog Discrete Input Discrete Pulse Input Output Output A1 SM Line Press BI I O Card B7 I O Card A4 Spare A5 Pulse Count A2 SM Line Press B8 T O Card B5 T O Card A6 Pulse Count A3 RTD B9 T O Card B6 I O Card B11 T O Card B2 T O Card B10 T O Card B12 T O Card B3 T O Card B4 I O Card Note B9 B10 and Note B9 B10 and B11 B12 El Battery B11 B12 can be can be either a DI or a PI but E2 Charge In either a DI or a PI but not both E3 Spare not both E4 Spare ES Battery Temp 4 32 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 5 THE DATA MENU 5 1 SCOPE This s
132. default is newest to oldest and return to the first block of the log in its new order Use the Save pushbutton to store the entire alarm log in a disk file that you specify Use the a1m extension when saving the Alarms History log file This file can be viewed or printed later using the Open option in the File menu Use the Print pushbutton to immediately send the entire log to a connected on line printer The log prints out approximately 50 entries to a page for a total of five pages The Next Block and Prev Block pushbuttons are used to move between blocks of alarm entries Each block contains up to 15 alarm entries Information about each alarm includes the date and time of the alarm the tag identifier whether the alarm is set or cleared the actual value of the alarmed point and the alarm description Refer to Figure 7 9 for a sample display ss Woe less briddass Grau GridBoss Distr ic Mara Log Time Downloaded 3 1a 99 10 34 59 Operator Log H 1 1 Date Time Tag Set Clear Value Description 03 18 99 09 37 46 PI Defli 1 Alari Sel awaa Lo Lo Alari 03 19 99 09 37 46 PI Deflt i Alara Sel 1 000008 Low Alara 3 18 99 09 33 13 Diff Pres Alara Sel 0 000 High Alarm 03 15 94 89 33 13 IIF Pres Alarm Sel 00008 Lor Alarm 43 15 94 49 21 42 Inver Loop Alarm Sel 10 UW Dutpui Far lure 22 14 99 2 1139 2bUndeFined 65 B6 10 7 5 185 117 23 10 Alndefined df 114 5176 98 P Sh 1424 J e OVERFLOM Qutput Failure 13 61 119
133. directly to an index of help screens you can select the Help Contents item from the Help menu A Help window appears with a comprehensive list of help topics in alphabetical order as shown in Figure 10 4 This is the same as the list obtained by using the Index pushbutton in the various Help windows In the resulting list of help topics select the desired topic either by clicking on the name with the mouse or by using the cursor keys to highlight the name and then pressing Enter The Help topics in the Index consist mainly of parameter names and menu options Note that some topic names have been abbreviated For example Analog Input functions appear with AT in front of the name such as in AI Alarms AI Scanning or AI Analog Inputs 10 4 Help 15 MINUTE HISTRY 1 ACTUAL SCAN ADAPTIVE ADJUSTED A D 0 ADJUSTED A D 100 AI ACTIVE ALARMS AI ADY FEATURES AI ALARMING AI ALARMS AI CALIBRATION E AI HIGH READ EU Page Downy Page Upp deg Cancel a a a anssi Figure 10 4 Help Contents Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 10 5 ABOUT Selecting the About option displays the dialog box shown in Figure 10 5 The Version number creation date and the serial number of the GRIDLINK software display Press the OK pushbutton to close the dialog box GRIDLINK W68083X0012 Version 0 00A 02 17 99 Fisher Controls Figure 10 5 About Dialog Box Rev 9 99 10 5 GRIDLINK User Manual
134. e ATDx dial the number 1 800 515 1212 tone dialing H II 9 12 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual NOTE The telephone numbers must include the exact sequence required at each Station and at the Host In certain cases the telephone numbers are the same however in other cases access numbers such as 9 and area codes 1 212 may be required Refer to Table 9 1 Comnect Time This parameter determines the amount of time that the GridBoss waits after initiating a call to receive a connect message from a device at the other end typically the Host before it terminates the call If a successful connection is made then the Disconnect Time begins The default value is 60 seconds Disconnect Time This parameter determines the amount of time that the GridBoss once it is connected and in off hook status a valid receive signal was seen waits for further activity on the line before it hangs up This timer resets and starts counting down after each valid receive signal The default value is 60 seconds Inactivity Time This parameter determines the amount of time that the GridBoss after there was an invalid signal sensed the GridBoss is still in the on hook status waits for a valid receive signal before it resets the modem This parameter is useful for resetting the modem in situations such as when the modem has connected at a baud rate that the GridBoss itself does not recognize The default value is 600 seconds Modem
135. e 4 10 Figure 4 10 AI Set Midpoint 3 00 0 eee eeeeeeeee 4 10 Figure 4 11 Analog OutputS oooconocononcconcnonnnnonns 4 11 Figure 4 12 Analog Outputs Advanced Features O wutia ids s 4 13 Figure 4 13 Discrete Inputs oooonnnncnonccnonccnnnns 4 15 Figure 4 14 Discrete Input Alarms 4 17 Figure 4 15 Discrete Inputs Advanced Features 4 18 Figure 4 16 Discrete Outputs 0 eee eeeeeeeeeee 4 20 Figure 4 17 Timed Duration Output Parameters dci iste 4 23 Figure 4 18 Discrete Outputs Advanced Features NN 4 24 Figure 4 19 Pulse Inputs ooonnnnnnnnnncnonccnoncconnno 4 25 Figure 4 20 Pulse Input Alarms eee 4 28 Rev 9 99 Figure 4 21 Pulse Inputs Advanced Features 4 30 Figure 5 1 FST Parameters FST Registers Point orando ias 5 3 Figure 5 2 FST Advanced Features eee 5 4 Figure 5 3 FST Editor ooooonoccnnocccnoncnonccinnncnonacinnnos 5 5 Figure 5 4 SOftpOlNtS ooooocnooccooncnonnnonncionaconanccnnnns 5 6 Figure 5 5 Radio Control oooocnnncnnnccnonnnonccnnncnnnnes 5 7 Figure 5 6 Radio Power Control Timing 5 8 Figure 5 7 Configurable Opcode Table 5 11 Figure 5 8 LCD User List 5 13 Figure 5 9 Point Definition 5 14 Figure 6 1 GridBoss Display oooooonncccnonncnonccnonns 6 2 Figure 6 2 GridBoss Character Display First Set RON 6 3 Figure 6 3 GridBoss Character Display Second Set O ON 6
136. e Left Arrow lt and to select the Utilities menu Press the Down Arrow J to select Macros and press Enter Press the Down Arrow J two times to select Stop Recording and press Enter Press your macro hot key combination such as Ctrl A to test the new macro 8 7 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 4 GRIDBOSS MEMORY Select Utilities from the menu bar and then choose GridBoss Memory A display appears that lets you specify the Segment and Offset of GridBoss memory that you want to view The GridBoss only displays the Address field When you enter numbers within the valid ranges of memory location and use the Update pushbutton the display updates to show the contents of 256 bytes of memory The hexadecimal Hex fields address and values are shown on the left and the ASCII character equivalents are shown on the right Refer to Figure 8 5 SF a FR 55 q 5 Bc Eb Gi St ab OF 73 fe Jd 36 55 55 ed 7f 68 4 wi wi wi c oF 55 43 ma fa da E SPSLSEGSEE EEE ES ESSE SHS Sete bs uF F shma it A Figure 8 5 GridBoss Memory Ws jue lA ek bib I Juul OF Fr Pe rel is N ale tigo dih Ra ikni o Ikin uau rari pr ANT 1 Ml ae Um ol ahis Al Sn 14 H i730 Maa je fs SLO Gr sth Use the Prev Block and Next Block pushbuttons to view the previous or next block 256 bytes of memory If you are viewing RAM you can use the Update pushbutton to refresh the screen with the most rece
137. e and battery voltage once a second The LPP stores 8 days of 15 minute averages of the low pressure point value and battery voltage The values always display with the most recent value first Refer to Figure 7 6 File Grad LU Wate Display History Utilities System Help curly History Gridiloss Address Gridfos GromGridies istrict Tims Downloaded 4 27 99 14 1 46 Operator RFE Log H I Base Time Inlet Pra Inner Loop Inner Loop Battery Inmer Loop H D H HIH EU PRG y Avg THRVAL AWG EU JANG DUTY AYG 21 11 0 0 0504040 0 006 ODA 49 3150 12 02667 0 Ge H 15430640 E BR 49 3158 12 219 74 0 QUO A BR 9 ILSA l 49588 6 0046408 A FSR A RR 9 158 1 MB 868 0D A aparar 9 3150 12 56503 6 0000404 2 aE a ATT 9 3150 12 49834 9 3150 17 48099 9 3158 12 515480 49 3158 1 amaga 1 a5 17 463467 12 41351 12 54036 17 30654 12 350 185 iii ar LI S i on oT ano eh et ld Mil 4 21 4 21 k 21 k 27 21 heel 4 21 4 21 4 21 k 21 i 27 dEl heel au q Ti g as f E Figure 7 6 15 Minute History You can use the pushbuttons at the bottom of the screen to view other history points to save the log to print the log or to view other days of 15 Minute data Use the Select New pushbutton to display history points other than the first six Use the Save pushbutton to store the log all selected history points in a disk file that you specify Use the pdb
138. e any all point types download and override the current configuration To deselect a component such as System Variables click on the X between the brackets in front of the component 7 When you are done selecting components press F8 Download File trad 10 Data Display History Utilities System Help ving Gridiloss configuration ta disk ving calibration and communications settings to disk wing existing FSTs to disk ower down ridloss Benlece Hardware POWER UP Gridboss press ENTER testoring existing FSTs fo the Gridlloss estorina configuration to the Gridiloss 5 estoring calibration and communications settings to the GridBoss Gri loss leis herm Es ces Pill rad i wegi ENTER t pa 11imije m Lair Figure 2 24 Updating Hardware The loading process may take several minutes depending on how large the backup configuration file is 8 When loading is complete the GridBoss re reads its configuration and records the actions in the Event Log While the memory is being modified the I O is not read but is held at the last values When installation is complete press Enter 2 11 CONVERT The Convert option converts the existing GridBoss history files to a spreadsheet format file for easy file exporting Convert is located under the File menu The following categories of data logs can be converted into a spreadsheet format 4 Minute History File extension MDB 15 Minute History File extension
139. e port or file being used for configuration is indicated For example if your cursor is in the Tag field of the Al screen the left hand side of the Status Line reads Enter a 10 character identifier for this point If GRIDLINK is communicating with a GridBoss through the first serial port of the PC the right hand portion of the Status Line reads ONLINE COM1 1 6 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 1 6 1 Computer Requirements The GRIDLINK configuration software runs on most IBM compatible personal computers PCs The PC can be a desktop or a portable computer In any case the PC should meet the following minimum requirements One high density 3 5 inch floppy disk drive MS DOS version 5 0 or higher 640 Kbytes of base RAM with 450K available for the GRIDLINK software 10 Mbytes of available hard disk space Monochrome CGA EGA or VGA video adapter o gt 1 6 2 Software Disk The GRIDLINK software is delivered on a 3 5 inch 1 44 Mbyte serialized diskette The disk includes the following files Y INSTALL EXE GRIDLINK installation executable file GRIDLINK EXE GRIDLINK executable file INS_MSG TXT ASCII text file used for installation messages INSTALL TXT ASCII text file used for installation instructions GRIDLINK LST ASCII text file used for installation listing instructions Rev 9 99 1 15 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 6 2 1 Copying a Disk Using DOS As a precaution
140. e should be set to 0 or 0 05 seconds Keyoff Delay Defines the amount of time to delay before transmitting a response once a valid message has been received and the period to delay before turning the RTS signal off key off delay The default Keyoff Delay is 0 seconds Timeout This is the actual amount of time the GRIDLINK software waits between retries when attempting to communicate through a Comm Port with a GridBoss The default time out is 0 50 seconds but this can be increased up to 255 seconds if you are having difficulties communicating with your GridBoss The communications port requires at least a 0 25 second timeout Do not enter 0 zero in the Timeout field GRIDLINK Address The GRIDLINK Address at the PC has a default value of 3 If more than one computer with GRIDLINK is communicating with a group of GridBoss units either by radio or by other multi drop communications the GRIDLINK Address of each GridBoss must be unique to avoid multiple responses The GRIDLINK Address must also be different from any other Host system that may access the network Valid entries include 1 to 247 GRIDLINK Group The GRIDLINK Group address at the PC has a default value of 1 In the assignment of GRIDLINK Group addresses the following convention should be used Group 0 Reserved DO NOT USE Group 1 Host Devices Group 2 99 GRIDLINK Group numbers available Group 100 Reserved for testing no CRC in GRIDLINK Group 101 239 GRIDLINK
141. e the mouse button To use the mouse in list boxes click on an item in a list to highlight it Then after highlighting an item you can select it with a mouse by double clicking clicking twice in rapid succession on it 1 5 4 Function Screens Function screens serve two purposes to provide information and allow the setting of configuration parameters Some function screens are strictly for providing information however most serve both purposes Function screens also called screens appear when a menu function is selected Screens typically have a title such as Regulator Control and a thin line border With the exception of the menu bar and the Status Line a function screen fills the whole display A screen typically has the following components Parameter with a value field Parameter with an option field Pushbutton standard or function key 1 12 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual File Direct Connect GridBoss Directory New DR Configuration LPP Configuration Open Event File Alarm File Minute History File 15 Minute History File Daily History File GridBoss Config File Collect GridBoss Data All TOD Profiles History Events Alarms Download GridBoss Config to Disk Disk Config to GridBoss TOD Profiles Update Firmware Update Hardware Convert Minute History File 15 Minute History File Daily History File Print Configuration GridLink Security Macros Record Macro Play Macro
142. e the GridBoss Host communications port COM1 Port to match the communication parameters of the receiving Host device Refer to Section 9 6 2 Configuring the Communications Port RBX Parameters Enable the RBX Mode parameter for the communications port and configure the RBX Features Refer to Section 9 6 3 Configuring Basic Alarming Parameters Enable and configure the Alarms for each point that you want to monitor through RBX Alarming Refer to Section 9 6 4 Configuring RBX Alarming Parameters Select the type of RBX Alarming desired for each alarm to be monitored Refer to Section 9 6 5 9 6 2 Configuring the Communications Port Basic Parameters The first major step for RBX Alarming is to ensure that the GridBoss port for communicating with the Host computer is properly configured The communication ports located on the GridBoss provide a data link to the GRIDLINK software other GridBoss units and Host systems The Host communications port is configured using GRIDLINK From the System menu select Comm Ports to display the GridBoss Comm Ports screen Refer to Figure 9 10 The GridBoss Comm Ports screen is used to set up communications ports available for incoming or outgoing communications with the GridBoss and not the personal computer PC Regardless of whether the link to the Host computer is being performed through a radio a serial line or a telephone line modem the parameters on this screen need to be set acc
143. eady have a previous version of GRIDLINK installed refer to Section 1 6 6 Upgrade Procedure on page 1 22 To install the GRIDLINK software on a personal computer perform the following steps 1 Create a backup copy of your GRIDLINK installation disk as explained previously Insert the GRIDLINK disk in the 3 5 inch floppy drive Select the Start button Select Run Type A install where A is the location of the floppy drive in step 2 Click OK YU Hn wh Type in a new Target Directory if you want to install the software in a directory other than the default C GRIDLINK The GRIDLINK default directory is recommended 8 Press the Install pushbutton Note that the Cancel pushbutton cannot be used after the installation utility begins When installation is complete the screen displayed in Figure 1 7 appears 9 Press Enter to close the DOS Install window 10 Remove the GRIDLINK installation disk 11 Log on to GRIDLINK Refer to Section 1 8 Logging On on page 1 28 12 Perform a Cold Start using the Restore config and clear history parameter Refer to Section 9 NOTE If you installed GRIDLINK in another directory other than the default GRIDLINK directory you must edit the GRIDLINK PIF file to indicate in which directory GRIDLINK resides Refer to Editing the GRIDLINK PIF in Windows 3 1x on page 1 22 or Editing the GRIDLINK PIF in Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT on page 1 23 Rev 9 99 1 21
144. ection 3 2 4 Adaptive on page 3 13 NOTE When in Manual Mode and Inner Loop Mode the LPP does not communicate with that DR again until the value entered in the Error Time Delay for DRs field has been met After the Error Time Delay period the LPP communicates with the DR to determine if it is in Outer Loop Mode or Adaptive Mode Refer to the GridBoss Instruction Manual Form A6074 for details concerning Control Modes 3 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Alarming You can either enable or disable alarm logging for the Output Monitor Fail alarm If you enable Alarms the RBX Alarm Options pushbutton becomes active The Output Monitor Fail alarm is the only alarm logged to the Alarm Log If you disable Alarms no alarm logging is generated for this regulator regardless of the Alarm configuration The default value is Enabled Loop Period The amount of time desired between control loop calculations in seconds The default value is 5 seconds to ensure that an updated Output Pressure process variable is received for each control loop calculation The Loop Period cannot be less than 1 second Calc Time This indicates the actual period of time in seconds between executions of the control loop algorithm and is the amount of time measured between executions from the beginning of one execution to the beginning of the next Active Alarms This field indicates any alarms that are active for the control process Alarms include
145. ection describes the Data Menu and how to configure a GridBoss for Function Sequence Tables FSTs Softpoints Radio Power Control Opcodes and front panel displays This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number FST Parameters 5 2 1 5 FST Editor 5 2 3 5 5 Radio Power Control 5 4 5 7 Opcode Setup 5 5 5 11 ser List Setup 5 6 5 13 Rev 9 99 5 1 GRIDLINK User Manual 5 2 FST Select Data from the menu bar and then choose FST Function Sequence Table You can then select either the FST Editor to create or alter an existing FST or you can select FST Register to create or monitor an FST Register point FST functions allow you to define and perform a set of specific actions to be taken when a set of conditions exists FSTs are typically specific to your installation For example an FST may be written that would be used as an emergency shutdown control when dangerous flow occurs or in any similar application that requires logic sequencing capability An FST defines the input to output relationships in the GridBoss through a set of user defined instructions called functions Functions define a specific sequence of actions to be performed The sequence of functions is executed at the frequency defined in the Timer parameter fields The functions are normally executed in the order of the sequence however the sequence may be altered by certain decision making functions such as 1f then statements loop
146. ed When configuring similar point types use the F4 Copy and F5 Paste options to speed configuration This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number AT Alarms 4 2 1 4 4 AT Calibration 4 2 3 4 DI Discrete Input Configuration 4 4 4 1 DI Advanced Features 4 4 2 4 18 DO Discrete Output Configuration 4 5 4 20 DO Advanced Features 4 5 2 4 24 PI Pulse Input Configuration 4 6 4 2 Pulse Input Alarms 4 6 1 4 28 PI Advanced Features 4 6 2 4 30 The I O menu allows you to go directly to the I O point you want to configure Point types not available for the GridBoss do not display Use the F2 Next and F3 Prev keys to display various points Rev 9 99 4 1 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 2 Al ANALOG INPUT CONFIGURATION Select I O from the menu bar and then choose AI Analog inputs are analog signals generated by measurement devices such as pressure and temperature transmitters including RTD probes Refer to Figure 4 1 An Analog Input AI may be used to communicate the position of the Kixcel to the DR Controller File Heter 10 Data Display i ilities Syetem Help Point Humber A 1 Tag PW Value 1 Umi ts Scan Period 1 Secs ma pe ppa led Low Reading EU isab led nabled High Reading A lt a a Alaras Alar rey Advanced Beatin ec AI Calibratio Update 52 Prery F3 Mesx ty FS Copy ES Pas tly F Cance lg FS Save Figure 4 1 Analo
147. ed to set the 100 percent input exactly at the High Reading EU value to eliminate transmitter and system errors The default value is 4000 Raw A D Input The current reading directly from the analog to digital converter The default value is 0 Actual Scan This is the actual amount of time in seconds that passes between scans This number should be the same as shown for the Scan Period parameter if the system is not overloaded The default value is 0 4 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Average Raw Values When Enabled the average of the raw readings during the Scan Period is calculated and used as the Raw A D Input during EU calculations For example An analog input point configured with a Scan Period of 1 second and Average Raw Values is Enabled obtains a new value from the A D every 200 milliseconds During the Scan Period 5 values are obtained from the A D and summed together At EU calculation the values summed are divided by the Actual Scan Period display and are used as the Raw A D Input You may desire to disable this function to acquire instantaneous values Temp Compensation When Enabled a temperature compensation curve is applied to the analog input using the board temperature of the GridBoss as a reference Use this feature to improve the A D conversion accuracy at temperature extremes for modular analog inputs only built in analog inputs already have temperature compensation If you use this feature be su
148. ed to the current output For a Discrete Output this is the actual output applied to open the DO if it is positive or to close the DO if it is negative The default value is 0 Mode The District Regulator controls the regulator Outlet Pressure by adjusting the output to the Kixcel in one of four modes using the GRIDLINK firmware The four modes that can be enabled are Off Control processing does not occur if Off is selected Manual Mode Values in Manual Mode are manually manipulated and do not include information from either the District Regulator or the Low Pressure Point This is the default Mode Inner Loop Mode Inner Loop Mode includes only information from the District Regulator and the Kixcel Information from the Low Pressure Point is not included Refer to Section 3 2 3 Tuning on page 3 10 Outer Loop Mode Outer Loop Mode includes both information from the District Regulator and the Low Pressure Point Outer Loop Mode allows the LPP to control the Inner Loop Setpoint An adaptive temperature coefficient and time of day profile are being calculated but are not used for control loop processing Adaptive Mode Adaptive Mode includes both information from the District Regulator and the Low Pressure Point in addition biases based on the time of day and temperature load profiles are also calculated and are used for control This pattern reduces the need for the LPP to continually call the DR Refer to S
149. eee 8 2 Liquid Crystal Display ooonoccnonocionnccnoncconncnonaninnnss 5 13 LIEBE i 1 13 Load Disk Configuration to GridBoss coooccinccc 2 21 Load Profiles t e 2 15 Load TOD Profiles ooooooccnnnoncconnoocccconcnonoonncncnnnnnnono 2 22 Loria odia ais 7 8 Loggins Onn aacuci ns Aan ea Ae etl 1 28 Logon Detalla hein he n 1 28 8 1 Logs ALAMOS aid 7 15 l BBEA OLS A OEE E EAEE 7 13 O O EAN G 3 LOR Cableado e eter e digest erate 2 3 GRIDLINK User Manual Loop Modes Selecting the Type uinnin aaas 3 6 Loop Poo ducado a e Ri 3 7 Low Bal e ea a a a a donde 3 3 Low Battery Shutoff spriin ainia 5 10 Low Battery Voltage Limit 3 12 3 23 4 4 Low Press Setpoint coocccnncccnonccnonncconcnononccnanccnonacinnass 3 21 Low Press Vale ge innat R R nai 3 21 Low Pressure Input cooooocnnnnnccccnnoocnnnncnnnnnonannncncnnnnnnos 3 21 Low Pressure Point c ccccssseecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeees G 2 A E 1 5 Low Pressure Point Controller GridBoss 602 econo nn iria iii 1 1 Low Reading EU cooooconocccconccconcconncnonccnonanononinnncinnncnn A 2 EPM eis E inden G 3 LPP Addressa e E 3 2 LPP Configuration ccoooccnnoccnonncnonnncnnoncnnnccnanccnonacinnaos 2 12 EPP Oropesa read 3 2 EPP Tai tos 3 2 EPPVA LL 7 5 EPVAL ini 7 5 M M s Aia G 3 Macros iieiintidieide niin nina hae 8 5 File Name cnrs inini sedan besteds 8 5 Keyra odian 8 5 Play Macros alisios 8 6 DANI A 8 5 Stop RecordiN8 ococonoccconcccnonononc
150. een shown in Figure 4 13 a dialog box appears that lets you configure features such as filtering input inversion and counter values for the discrete input Refer to Figure 4 15 Advanced Features Filter Interval Input 5 60 Seconds gt Inverted 2 Filter Accumulated Ual 5 On Counter 5 OFF Counter 4551 Figure 4 15 Discrete Inputs Advanced Features Filter Interval and Filter These two parameters are used together to determine the amount of time 4 18 that the discrete input must remain in the ON high state before it is recognized as such The Filter time is entered as a number from 0 to 255 and the Filter Interval selection determines the time basis The discrete input returns to the OFF state immediately upon detection of the ON to OFF transition there is no filtering for this transition When Filter Interval is 0 25 Seconds the Filter is defined as the number of 250 millisecond intervals before the input is recognized Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual When Filter Interval is 15 0 Seconds the Filter is defined as the number of 15 second intervals before the input is recognized The default value for Filter Interval is 0 25 and the default value for Filter is 2 Input Select Normal for the input going high contact closure to produce an ON Status Select Inverted to cause the field input to be inverted in the Status parameter field If the DI has the Input Inverted field set the field input
151. en is detailed in Section 3 1 32 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual It is recommended that the DR and LPP configuration information along with the communications parameters such as Baud Rate be configured before the units are deployed in the field Each unit should be marked or labeled This allows further configuration from a central location The Sensor Module transducer calibrations should be recorded and if known should be configured before the units are deployed It is also useful to synchronize the Date and Time in each unit Refer to New gt DR Configuration and New gt LPP Configuration in Section 2 1 10 4 GRIDLINK Screen Colors The GRIDLINK screens are made up of different types of objects such as windows list boxes radio buttons and pushbuttons Each type of object has its own color scheme which is a collection of color attributes that apply to that particular type of object Windows for example have different color attributes for the border title and background Data entry objects have highlighted normal and unavailable color attributes GRIDLINK uses an array of eight color attributes to define each color scheme Each member of the array is a two byte integer and is named al a2 a8 Depending on the object type all eight attributes may or may not be used The default object color schemes COLOR1 through COLOR 19 and an additional custom color scheme COLOR21 are defined in the GRIDLINK INI file and read when GRIDLINK
152. enu gt DI Intrusion Switch I O menu gt PI Not required by the GridBoss GPC system History menu gt Setup Data menu gt User List Setup LCD display System menu gt Comm Ports DR and LPP communications System menu gt Comm Ports gt Modem Host communications Data menu gt Radio Control Data menu gt FST Utilities menu gt Security System menu gt Flags for saving to internal configuration memory ef fF gt gt o oo oo H H He 2 Display menu gt New Display Rev 9 99 1 31 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 10 2 Duplicating a Configuration Once you have completed the configuration for one GridBoss you can duplicate the configuration for a similar GridBoss by using these menu functions in the following order 1 File gt Download gt GridBoss Config to Disk which saves the configuration to a specified file 2 File gt Direct Connect or GridBoss Directory that physically connects the second unit and then communicates using this function 3 File gt Download gt Disk Config to GridBoss opens the configuration file and loads it into the second GridBoss unit After you have loaded configuration data into the second GridBoss Step 3 above and changed it as required you can save the configuration to its own disk file by using Step 1 Refer to Section 2 for further information on each of the functions previously mentioned 1 10 3 Communications Overview The GridBoss system consists of LPP uni
153. er Control Loop Monitors tattoos 6 20 Figure 7 1 History Setup ocooococccnocnnoncciononanccnnnnnos 7 2 Figure 7 2 Archived Value csccesesseeeseeeeeees 7 4 Figure 7 3 Min Max History 7 7 Figure 7 4 Select NeW ooconccnnccnoncncnncconcnoncancncnnnos 7 8 Figure 7 5 Minute History ooccooccconcnonccnnncnoncninnnss 7 9 Figure 7 6 15 Minute History oococcnocccconononcnnnos 7 10 Figure 7 7 Day HIStOTY cooooooccnoncccnnoncccnonnnnnnnnnnos 7 12 1 5 GRIDLINK User Manual Figure 7 8 Event Log History ooooocccccoocccnncnnnnnonns 7 14 Figure 7 9 Alarm Log History 7 15 Figure 8 1 GRIDLINK Operator Security 8 2 Figure 8 2 GridBoss Access Security coooccconcccon s 8 4 Figure 8 3 Record MacIO ccooccnocccnoninonccnonccnnnonannnos 8 5 Figure 8 4 Play Macro oooooooccnnccnonononcnononconanccnnnnnos 8 6 Figure 8 5 GridBoss Memory ccoocccnocccnocccnonncnonans 8 8 Figure 8 6 Al Calibration Values cece 8 9 Figure 9 1 Clock Display oooooccnonccnnocccnonncnonaos 9 2 Figure 9 2 System Information oooocconoccconncnonnns 9 3 Figure 9 3 Firmware Information ooooccnoccconcnonnos 9 5 Figure 9 4 Revision Info 9 6 Figure 9 5 GridBoss Flags oonooccconcccnocccnonncnonaos 9 7 Figure 9 6 Cold Start Options ooooocccoccconnconncnonnon 9 8 Figure 9 7 GridBoss Comm Ports Screen 9 11 Figure 9 8 Modem ConfiguratiON coooooncocccnnnonns 9 12 Fig
154. ere you want them Refer to alarm information in Section 3 or 4 for further details For our example of using the differential pressure alarm configure the Low Alarm High Alarm LoLo Alarm HiHi Alarm and Rate Alarm limits as well as the Alarm Deadband accordingly such that an alarm occurs only when desired Refer to Figure 9 13 Low Alarm D RB Alarming High Alarm Disabled LoLo Alarm C 3 0n Alarm Set Cancel HiHi Alarm C 3 0n Alarm Clear sd Rate Alarm C DOn Alarm Set amp Clear Alarm Deadband Figure 9 13 Establishing RBX Alarming 9 6 5 Configuring RBX Alarming Parameters The last step in setting up RBX Alarming is to select the type of alarming desired for each RBX alarm monitored Before you do this you may want to make sure that each point to be monitored for RBX Alarming is not currently in alarm otherwise the GridBoss will immediately attempt to contact the Host To configure RBX Alarming for a point use the Alarms dialog box and change the RBX Alarming parameter to On Alarm set On Alarm Clear or On Alarm Set amp Clear Refer to Figure 9 13 Disabled Select Disabled under RBX Alarming to turn this option OFF On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message and sends it to the receiving Host device On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message and sends it to the
155. ering unit options are available for pulse inputs The operating mode of each selection is Rate Max Rollover PI Value in EUs corresponds to the pulses per scan times the Rate Period times the Conversion factor PI Value in EUs is cleared at Contract Hour Today s Total specifies the total EUs accumulated today At Contract Hour this value is transferred to Yesterday s Total and Today s Total is cleared Today s Total Max Rollover PI Value in EUs corresponds to the accumulated pulses today times the Conversion factor Today s Total specifies the total EUs accumulated today At Contract Hour this value is transferred to Yesterday s Total and Today s Total is cleared Running Total Entered Rollover The PI Value in EUs corresponds to the accumulated pulses today times the Conversion factor If the PI Value in EUs exceeds the rollover EU value it is cleared The PI Value in EUs is not cleared at Contract Hour Today s Total specifies the total EUs accumulated today At Contract Hour this value is transferred to Yesterday s Total and Today s Total is cleared Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Rollover Value EUs When Running Total Entered Rollover is selected in the EU Options field enter a number in EUs not pulses to specify when the rollover should occur Rate Period Three different time bases or periods can be selected to perform the rate calculation These periods are minutes hours or
156. ering units to which the input must rise to generate a high alarm The alarm is generated if the Value is greater than or equal to the High Alarm input for the PI The default value is 100 LoLo Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the input must fall to generate a low low alarm The value is set lower than the Low Alarm The default value is 0 HiHi Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the input must rise to generate a high high alarm The value is set higher than the High Alarm The default value is 110 Rate Alarm The value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change allowed between Scan Period updates Refer to PI Scanning If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated To disable the Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Alarm EU value must be set greater than the Span of the PI The default value is 5 Alarm Deadband The value in engineering units that is an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The Alarm Deadband provides a range that the Value in EU may move between without causing another alarm when the EU Options is set up for a Rate Max Rollover Otherwise the Alarm Deadband serves as the Rollover Maximum The purpose of an Alarm Deadband is to prevent the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This also pr
157. essed in local time 24 hour clock For example 1500 under Zone 2 means that the associated On Time and Off Time are used beginning at 3 00 p m The default value for Start Time 1 is 700 The default value for Start Time 2 and Start Time 3 is 9999 9999 indicates that the zone is disabled On Time Time during a power cycle when the output is in the ON state in seconds unless the Minutes mode has been enabled for the respective zone Note that the time is accurate to 0 2 seconds rounded up For example 6 5 under Zone 1 means that the power will be on for 6 6 seconds during each cycle that occurs in Zone 1 The default value for On Time 1 is 2 The default value for On Time 2 and Start Time 3 is 0 Off Time Time during a power cycle that the output is in the OFF state in seconds unless the Minutes mode has been enabled for the respective zone Note that the time is accurate to 0 2 seconds rounded up For example 18 5 under Zone 1 means that the power will be off for 18 6 seconds during each cycle that occurs in Zone 1 The default value for Off Time 1 is 6 The default value for Off Time 2 and Off Time 3 is 0 Rev 9 99 5 9 GRIDLINK User Manual Hold Time Time that the output remains ON after detection of communications activity in seconds unless the Minutes mode has been enabled This value applies to all zones Note that the time 1s accurate to 0 2 seconds rounded up When communications occur durin
158. eter name many of these values can be changed Options are listed below the parameter name with the selected option highlighted Pushbuttons display dialog boxes for further configuration details or perform a desired action such as the Adaptive pushbutton shown in Figure 1 1 The pushbuttons are activated either by clicking with a mouse or by pressing a key either the Enter key when the pushbutton is highlighted or a function key see Section 1 5 3 Dialog boxes are areas that pop up inside the current screen to allow further selections or values to be entered They can also provide messages or information that is more detailed Rev 9 99 1 7 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 5 2 Menu Bar and Menus The menu bar is the first thing that appears on the screen after successfully logging on Refer to Figure 1 1 The initial menu bar includes only the File and Help menus When you connect to a GridBoss or open a configuration file the complete menu bar appears Note that your security level may limit the menus available to you from the menu bar Refer to Section 8 for information concerning security levels LD Date Display History Utilities System Help Menu Bar Menu gt tos Contro 1 at Direct Connect GridBoss Directory Type Dala 5 pe i LS Parameter Name OF Alorpina dari Download Inner Loop Update Firmware uter Loop Update Mardeare Adaptive Data Field ei Calc Tise 8 BORORO Secs m Hinule History q fabient Temp Fail Dai
159. events the Alarm Log from being over filled with data The default value is 2 RBX Alarming RBX Alarming allows you to send a Report by Exception alarm to the Host when the point alarm condition is met Disabled Select Disabled under RBX Alarming to turn this option OFF This is the default value On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Set amp Clear In either condition an RBX message generates to the Host Note that RBX Alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured Rev 9 99 4 29 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 6 2 Pl Advanced Features When you press the Advanced Features pushbutton in the Pulse Input screen shown in Figure 4 19 a dialog box appears that lets you configure features such as EU Options Rate Period and Conversion for the pulse input Refer to Figure 4 21 EU Options Rate Max Rollover Today s Total Max Rollover Running Total Entered Rollover 2 Rollover Value EUs Rate Period Conversion EU min E EUs pulse EU hour _ pulses EU EU da Figure 4 21 Pulse Inputs Advanced Features EU Options Select the type of EU Option for the type of Pulse Input and the action for the 4 30 accumulator mode Different engine
160. extension when saving the 15 Minute History log You can specify the number of entries to be saved up to the maximum of 840 This file can be viewed or printed later using the Open option in the File menu 7 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Use the Print pushbutton to immediately send the entire log to a connected on line printer The log prints out up to six history points to a page The Next Block and Prev Block pushbuttons are used to move between blocks of 15 Minute logs Each block contains up to 60 15 Minute entries To look at the entries past the first 15 entries in the currently selected block use the scroll bar on the side of the list The scroll bar only works for the currently selected block you cannot scroll between blocks 7 6 DAY HISTORY Select History from the menu bar and then choose Day The Day History Daily History database option displays the values for history points other than FST controlled logged in the GridBoss on a daily basis for the past 35 entries The daily log entry is created at the end of the Contract Hour except when Force End of Day see System Information screen is used The time stamp for Daily Historical logging consists of the month day hour and minute The exception is for FST Second logging in which the time stamp consists of the day hour minute and second Each history point has daily historical log entries unless the history point is configured for FST controlled logging The
161. f the AO is set to Manual Mode Scanning Disabled no changes occur unless manually entered RBX Alarming RBX Alarming allows you to send a Report by Exception alarm to the Host when the point alarm condition is met Disabled Select Disabled under RBX Alarming to turn this option OFF On Alarm Set When the point enters an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Clear When the point leaves an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Set amp Clear In either condition an RBX message generates to the Host Note that RBX Alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured 4 14 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 4 DI DISCRETE INPUT CONFIGURATION Select I O from the menu bar and then choose DI Discrete inputs come from relays switches and other devices which generate an on off open close or high low signal Refer to Figure 4 13 The DI can be used with the optional intrusion switch to detect tampering with the GridBoss File Meter 11 Data Display History Utilities System Help Point Humber E 7 Tag DI Defli 1 Status H A Scan Period 1 Sees Active Alarms Hane DIN Type Ariel Alarming Standard al nable i DisabTad Latched I Disable Enable Alamos Advanced Featuresm ll Fi pda y F2 lireu li o y i F Iori MES Pas te F Cance lg MET
162. f three possibilities EU minute EU hour or EU day The following shows the calculation of the Current Rate in two different ways 1 If Conversion Mode EUs pulse and Rate Period EU min then Current Rate accumulated pulses Conversion Scan Period conversion from seconds to min 2 If Conversion Mode pulses EU and Rate Period EU hour then Current Rate accumulated pulses Conversion Scan Period conversion from seconds to hour Scanning These options let you enable or disable Scanning for this point For the input to receive and process the field input it must be Enabled While Scanning is Enabled Status indicates the input state When Scanning is Disabled Manual Mode Status becomes a control for determining the state of the input to the GridBoss overriding the field input and effectively placing the input into Manual Mode If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Rev 9 99 4 27 GRIDLINK User Manual Alarming These options let you enable or disable Alarming for this point If you enable alarms the alarms are configured and displayed in the Alarms pop up window Alarms are also logged to the Alarm Log To optimize processor time alarms should be Enabled only when necessary If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this point regardless of the Alarm configuration Active Alarms Indicates if alarms are set or not The Active Alarms field indicates any al
163. fields on the display Auto Scan Stop Scan Use the Auto Scan pushbutton to periodically approximately once a second update all live data fields on the display Use the Stop Scan pushbutton to stop the automatic updating and toggle the pushbutton label back to Auto Scan Edit Display Use this pushbutton to place the display into the edit mode The pushbuttons available at the bottom of the screen change to New Copy Cut Paste Save Cancel and Character Set Refer to section 6 2 1 for an explanation of how to use these pushbuttons Cancel Closes the currently selected display screen and returns you to the Display menu Save Values If the value in a live data field was manually changed this pushbutton causes the entered value to be sent to corresponding parameter in the GridBoss Whether or not the parameter actually accepts the new value depends on the whether the parameter can be written to as well as other factors Rev 9 99 6 13 GRIDLINK User Manual 6 3 MONITOR Select Display from the menu bar and then choose Monitor Use Monitor to view all installed and active I O points and PID Loops that provide information about the GridBoss and its operating environment With the appropriate devices installed the Monitor feature includes the following 4 Monitor Discrete Input Monitor Discrete Output Monitor Analog Input 4 Monitor Analog Output 4 Monitor Pulse Input Control Loop Once you have
164. fine the point parameters you desire to view on the LCD display Undefined indicates that no parameter has been specified Refer to Figure 5 9 NOTE Interpret the information on the Point Definition pushbutton for example AIN A 3 EU in the following manner The first part is a three character mnemonic in this example AIN means Analog Input that indicates the Point Type The second part such as A 3 indicates the Point Number The third part is a mnemonic indicating the selected Parameter such as EU for the Filtered Engineering Units Parameter Refer to Table 7 1 in Section 7 History Setup Rev 9 99 5 13 GRIDLINK User Manual Undefined Discrete Inputs Discrete Oulpuls Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Pulse Inputs ROC Flags ROC Comma Forts System Variables A 46 16 Figure 5 9 Point Definition Description Description of the parameter to be viewed on the LCD The Description has a 10 character limit Data 1 to 16 You may define up to 16 point definitions to be displayed in the User List on the LCD The LCD displays the data at approximately three second intervals 5 14 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 6 THE DISPLAY MENU 6 1 SCOPE This section describes the Display menu of the GRIDLINK configuration software The Display menu allows you to create customized displays load a new display from a disk file and monitor control loops and I O points This section cont
165. for the minute is out of range The GRIDLINK software runs on a personal computer such as a laptop or notebook style in a MS DOS operating system version 5 0 or higher or in a DOS window This manual covers configuration calibration monitoring database archiving custom displays and embedded utilities of the GRIDLINK software 1 1 2 Organization This manual is organized according to the menu structure of the GRIDLINK software A section is dedicated to each item on the menu bar The manual is organized into the following major sections 4 Section 2 The File Menu Section 5 The Data Men Section 6 The Display Menu Section 7 The History Menu Section 8 The Utilities Menu Section 9 The System Men Section 10 The Help Men Appendix A Timed Duration Output Glossary of Term Topical Index Rev 9 99 1 1 GRIDLINK User Manual able of Contents Lists each section and information contained in that section of the document Section 1 Getting Started describes this manual and mentions related manuals This section also provides a summary of the GRIDLINK software installation hardware overview basic software functions user interface and logging on to the GRIDLINK software Section 2 The File Menu provides information concerning options located under the File menu before and after logging on to GRIDLINK including Direct Connect GridBoss Directory
166. for this point For the output to process the field output it must be Enabled While Scanning is Enabled the Status field indicates the output state When Scanning is Disabled Manual Mode the Status field becomes a control for determining the state of the output from the GridBoss overriding the field output and effectively placing the output into Manual Mode If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Time On In Momentary mode this is the amount of time in seconds that the momentary contact is energized In the Toggle mode this value is the time in seconds between switching ON or OFF In the TDO and TDO Toggle modes this value is just an indicator of the on time of the output EU Value pulse width In each case the default value is 1 Active Alarms The Active Alarms field indicates any alarms that are active for this point TDO Parameters Refer to page 4 23 Advanced Features Refer to page 4 24 After configuring a point press F8 Save and use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display to save I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 4 22 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 5 1 TDO Parameters The TDO Parameters pushbutton only becomes accessible when one of the DOUT Types other than Latched is selected in the Discrete Outputs screen This screen is used to establish Timed Duration Output values Refe
167. g Inputs The F4 Copy and F5 Paste can be used to save configuration time by allowing you to copy data from one configuration screen to another of the same type Point Number The Point Number indicates the location of the point such as rack and module number in the GridBoss The Point Number is automatically assigned by the GridBoss and cannot be edited Each analog input has a unique Point Number to identify the input Each AI point must be individually configured Refer to Section 4 7 Input and Output Point Numbers on page 4 32 If there is more than one point available in the GridBoss you can page to the other points by using F2 Prev and F3 Next 4 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual For a District Regulator Controller the analog input points include Al PDR inlet pressure A2 DR outlet pressure A3 RTD temperature main board input El Battery voltage diagnostic E2 Charge in diagnostic B2 B3 and B4 Analog Inputs from the I O card For a Low Pressure Point Controller the analog input points include A2 LPP input line pressure El Battery voltage diagnostic E2 Charge in diagnostic B2 B3 and B4 Analog Inputs from the optional I O card Tag Enter up to 10 characters to identify the point being defined in this screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used Value The value in engineering units of the last analog input scan In Manual Mode Scan
168. g other places such as FSTs to ensure that the Cycle Time remains greater than the calculated On Time for proper operation Rev 9 99 A 5 GRIDLINK User Manual A 6 This page intentionally left blank Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual GLOSSARY OF TERMS AGA American Gas Association AI Analog Input AO Analog Output Analog Analog data is represented by a continuous variable such as a electrical current signal AP Absolute Pressure APC Adaptive Predictive Control ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange Built in I O I O channels that are fabricated into the ROC FloBoss and GridBoss controller they do not require a separate module Also called on board I O COM1 Port on the ROC364 FloBoss 500 series and GB600 series that may be used for host communications depending on the installed communications card On the FloBoss 407 this port is built in and dedicated to RS 232 serial communications Configuration Typically the software setup of a device such as a ROC FloBoss or GridBoss controller that can often be defined and changed by the user Can also mean the hardware assembly scheme CSA Canadian Standards Association DB Database dB Decibel A unit that gives the ratio of the magnitudes of two signals on a logarithmic scale DCD Carrier Detect communications signal DI Discrete Input Discrete Input or out
169. g the On Time the On Time is extended by the Hold Time The DTR signal remains ON the receive interrupts remain enabled and the Discrete Output if used remains in the ON state The default value is 10 Low Battery Shutoff Enter a value that specifies the voltage at which Power Control will be automatically disabled The voltage being sensed is the Power In diagnostic analog input E2 or Battery voltage diagnostic analog input E1 The Low Battery Shutoff parameter allows power cycling to be automatically disabled whenever the input voltage to the GridBoss falls below the specified threshold The default value is 11 5 volts Power Timer Counts down the amount of time On Time Off Time or Hold Time that the Radio Control is currently using The value is the number of seconds or minutes remaining as indicated Note that the time is accurate to 0 2 seconds The default value is O On Counter Value indicating the cumulative time that the Power Control has been in the ON state The default value is 0 Off Counter Value indicating the cumulative time that the Power Control has been in the OFF state The default value is 0 Make sure that if a report by exception RBX message needs to be sent to the Host computer the radio power will be turned on accordingly The radio power should stay on long enough to allow the GridBoss to receive a response back from the Host Refer to Section 9 concerning RBX At least three requests sh
170. ghlighted field for use Tab Moves cursor out of list box into next dialog box component The Help menu available from the menu bar provides on screen information about getting started with the GRIDLINK software performing keyboard operations listing the Help topics and providing the GRIDLINK version control number For more information refer to Section 10 To display context sensitive help on a menu item a parameter or a pushbutton do the following with the item parameter or pushbutton highlighted press F9 A Help window dialog box appears on the screen If there are more lines of text than fit in the Help window you can use the Page Down and Page Up pushbuttons at the bottom of the Help window You may also use another scrolling method Refer to list box in Section 1 5 5 to view the rest of the information 1 14 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual To go directly to an index of help topics use the Index pushbutton In the resulting list of topics select the desired topic either by clicking on the name with the mouse or by using the cursor keys to highlight the name and then press Enter To leave the Help window and return to where you were use the Exit pushbutton or press the Esc key The Status Line help serves two purposes first on the left side of the line brief information about the currently highlighted menu item configuration parameter or pushbutton is provided second on the right side of the line th
171. gs allow access to control bytes that affect various aspects of system operation Be sure you understand the function of the Flags before changing them Press the appropriate pushbutton or highlight and press Enter to set the Flag The action implied by the Flag is performed when you press F8 Save CAUTION Be very careful when using the GridBoss Flags Certain Flags can cause data to be lost parameter values to be changed or configuration memory to be cleared Eil eira A Aata Maple Bsp Ut wt did ige Sue tew Help gS Ware Start a doy Enabled Cold Start ip Loney l ll Disabled Clear Internal Config Kemory fo qe peempins ma if Write bo Internal Config Hemory Hoy I Disabled Write Status Complete Sei RIS High for JB sacs OnPort Ho 3 Coal Ho 5 H dois Ilan y ron dalebase stored im Figure 9 5 GridBoss Flags Press F1 Update to request the most recent values from the GridBoss to refresh the current display Press F8 Save to save all changes Press F6 Cancel to cancel all actions since the last save and close the currently selected display screen Press Advanced Features to display extended parameters or functions Warm Start When Yes the GridBoss is initialized from RAM if it is valid If the RAM is valid databases and FSTs remain intact If the RAM does not have a valid configuration written in it the configuration last saved to programmable ROM is used This save is performed using Wri
172. h three characters after the period for example Convert2 txt or History2 txt When you press OK the file is created Start Converting After selecting the type of conversion format press Start Converting to convert the files Cancel Press Cancel to exit the Conversion screen 2 12 PRINT CONFIGURATION Select the Print Configuration option in the File menu to print the current configuration to the default on line printer Refer to Figure 2 26 File Grid 1 0 Data Display History Utilities System Help Print Configuration System Variables SSS p o aoe aoe ape ape ane alo el Le ll ll e ed ES Cancela F8 Print Figure 2 26 Print Configuration for GB601 DR Controller Select the configuration variables you desire to print and press F8 Print to print your selections Rev 9 99 2 29 GRIDLINK User Manual NOTE The printer must be a line printer Print Configuration does not support PostScript printers 2 13 GRIDLINK SECURITY The GRIDLINK Security feature is available from the initial File menu before you connect to the GridBoss Select the GRIDLINK Security option in the File menu to edit the log ons of all users of the GRIDLINK software on this PC In the screen that appears you can specify the Operator ID Password and Level of up to 21 different users Refer to Section 8 for more information 2 14 MACROS The Macros feature is available from the in
173. have the same basic configuration The advantage of off line configuration is the ability to perform most of the configuration without connecting to the GridBoss This is especially an advantage if you are modifying the configuration of an operating GridBoss since it can minimize down time The Low Pressure Point GridBoss 602 is located downstream from the District Regulator The Low Pressure Point LPP uses the Sensor Module SM sensor to acquire the pressure from the low pressure point in the gas distribution system 2 6 OPEN The Open option allows you to open an existing file After you select Open from the File menu a sub menu appears as in Figure 2 7 allowing you to select one of the following types of files to open Event File extension EVT Alarm File extension ALM e Minute History File extension MDB 15 Minute History File extension PDB 4 4 Daily History File extension DAY GridBoss Config File extension GCF 2 12 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual File Direct Connect GridBoss Directory New Open r Event File Alarm File Minute History File 15 Minute History File Fl Daily History File GridBoss Config File Exit ALT X Figure 2 7 Open Menu Options After selecting the type of file to open the Open File dialog box displays to allow you to select the file Refer to Figure 2 8 Use the Up A and Down J arrow keys to select the desi
174. he LPP to communicate with the currently selected DR press the Force Update pushbutton to Set and press F8 Save If Force Update is Set and the DR is enabled for communications the LPP attempts to communicate with the DR 3 16 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Outer Loop Tuning Outer Loop Tuning is defined with a cascade PID control of the regulator Outlet Pressure with the Setpoint calculated from a PID loop controlling the Low Pressure Point LPP Proportional Proportional gain is the ratio of the change in output to the change in input based on the control action in which there is a continuous linear relationship between the output and input An initial Proportional gain setting of 0 01 is recommended to avoid loop instability The default value is 0 01 Integral Integral gain is the ratio of the change in output to the change in input based on control action in which the output is proportional to the time integral of the input An initial Integral gain setting of 100 is recommended to avoid loop instability This value is in terms of repeats per minute The default value is 100 Derivative Derivative gain is the ratio of the change in output to the change in input based on the control action in which the output is proportional to the rate of change of the input An initial Derivative gain setting of 0 is recommended to avoid loop instability The default value is 0 Scale Factor A number representing the
175. he Low Press Setpoint When the Avg Low Press Value is within this window alarming does not occur For example if you enter 5 there will be a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the Low Press Setpoint in which the Avg Low Press Value can move without causing an alarm The LPP calculates the input pressure average over a minute and compares it to the Setpoint The default value is 25 Rev 9 99 3 21 GRIDLINK User Manual Avg Low Press Value The Average Low Pressure Value over the last minute The LPP sends the change in Inner Loop Low Press Setpoint and the Avg Low Press Value to the DR when the LPP average pressure for the minute is outside of the low pressure Setpoint Deadband The default value is 0 Comm Port for DRs Select the communications port at the LPP This is the communications port the LPP uses to communicate with all District Regulators The default value is COM1 Check in Time for DRs Enter a value in minutes that determines how often the LPP communicates with the District Regulators The maximum value is 8 hours 480 minutes and the minimum time is 1 minute The Check in Time for DRs should always be greater than the Error Time Delay for DRs The default value is 480 minutes If the LPP does not call the DR every 9 hours the DR shifts from Adaptive or Outer Loop Mode to Inner Loop Mode and the Kixcel is set to the Inner Loop s Default Setpoint Deadband Time Delay for DRs Enter a value in
176. he Low Pressure Point and the District Regulator or as part of a communications system which includes a Host Monitored values are processed and stored for access by personnel in the field using either the LCD display of the GridBoss or a notebook personal computer PC containing the GRIDLINK Configuration Software Supervisors and managers at central or field offices can remotely monitor the GridBoss through a Host computer The GridBoss units use internal software called firmware for gathering input data converting raw input data into calculated values storing values and providing control signals Two diagnostic inputs monitor input power battery voltage and enclosure battery temperature Two basic types of memory are used in the GridBoss units Read Only Memory ROM and Random Access Memory RAM The ROM is programmable called flash memory A portion of the ROM holds the firmware which is programmed by the factory to contain the operating system and various application programs Another portion of programmable ROM stores certain configuration and default values The RAM which is backed up by its own power source stores history data and additional configuration data The GRIDLINK software can access both programmable ROM and the RAM Further information is provided in the GB600 Series Instruction Manual Form A6075 1 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 1 5 USER INTERFACE You interact with the GRIDLINK software using variou
177. he current screen to a memory buffer This copy of the data can then F5 Paste to another point of the same type to save time in configuring similar points 1 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual F5 Paste Paste the configuration data saved in the copy buffer using F4 Copy to the currently displayed screen This overwrites the data on the screen with the data copied from the similar point After using F5 Paste you can make further changes such as to the Tag Remember to F8 Save the data to the GridBoss or to a disk file F6 Cancel Quit the screen without saving any changes that may have been made F8 Save Save changes either to configuration memory in the GridBoss on line configuration or to a disk file off line configuration 1 5 3 2 Using the Mouse When using a mouse to access the menus you can activate any item on the menu bar by clicking on the item Likewise you can activate any item in a menu by clicking on it Keep in mind that where the keyboard method highlights an item and then activates it clicking with the mouse highlights and activates the selected item in one step If you want you can press the mouse button and drag the mouse cursor through other menu items or off the menus entirely Whatever is highlighted if anything when you release the mouse button becomes active NOTE A DOS or Windows mouse driver must be present in your system to use a mouse Note that in this manual the menus are arranged
178. he existing name 2 7 1 All All saves Time of Day TOD load profiles report under FILENAME TOD DR only 15 Minute History values under FILENAME PDB Daily History values under FILENAME DAY Events under FILENAME EVT Alarms under FILENAME ALM o o When you select All or any other option under Collect GridBoss Data the associated files are created immediately in the default GRIDLINK directory The Collect GridBoss Data All function retrieves the data and stores it in disk files such as those with an TOD extension Rev 9 99 2 15 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 7 2 TOD Profiles When using a District Regulator GB601 the Collect GridBoss Data TOD Profiles function retrieves the detailed time of day load profiles and stores it in disk files such as those with a TOD or PRN extension When you select TOD Profiles all time of day load profiles associated with the District Regulator GB601 controller are saved The first Save File dialog box allows you to enter the File Name for the TOD files which are used by the GridBoss After a short time a second Save File dialog box displays The second Save File dialog box allows you to enter the File Name for the PRN files which are used by you The PRN file is the time of day profile formatted in a spreadsheet format A PRN file can be imported into Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet application You can than use the data to create a graphical representation of
179. her In an option field the currently selected option marked with an asterisk between the parentheses is highlighted To select one of the other options use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to highlight the desired option and then press Enter The new selection is then marked with an asterisk Rev 9 99 1 9 GRIDLINK User Manual In a field that requires a text or numerical entry type the required characters or numbers from the keyboard Use the Backspace or Delete keys to erase unwanted characters In a text field you can use the Right Arrow and Left Arrow keys to move the cursor one character at a time and the Home and End keys to place the cursor at the beginning and end of the field respectively The following keys or key combinations permit you to perform certain operations pertaining to GRIDLINK Alt X While holding down the Alt key press the x key to exit or quit the GRIDLINK software Esc In general this key cancels the current activity If a screen is active this key closes the screen and returns you to the last used place in the menu structure If a dialog box is active this key closes the box and returns you to the screen or other place from which the dialog box originated If a menu is active this key closes the last opened menu taking you up one level in the menu structure If the menu bar is active this key de selects all menu options so that none are highlighted you then need to use the Alt key
180. her Controls International Field Automation Systems GRIDLIMXITR Configuration Software Installation Utility la install CRIDLINE enter the desired drive and directory or use the default AUGRTOL TRE Then tah to the Install pushbutton and press ENTER or click on it ith o mouse te 1 If wou are running GRIDLIAE under HinS5 or NT see the GRIDLIHA User amal Section 1 for instructions an how to set the idle sensitivity ota 2 TF wou are cunning GRIGLIHK under Windows 3 1 or Wont and GRIDLUKK 15 going Lo ba installed to a directory other than EsAGRTOL THE please modify tha F E PIF fi to have the gh Installation is complete press RENEE to return do 015 opving Cy GRIDLTME 91101 exe AN Figure 1 7 Installation Complete Screen Rev 9 99 1 19 GRIDLINK User Manual 7 8 9 10 Press Enter to return to the DOS prompt Remove the GRIDLINK installation disk Log on to GRIDLINK Refer to Section 1 8 Logging On on page 1 28 Perform a Cold Start using the Restore config and clear history parameter Refer to Section 9 1 6 4 Software Installation Procedure Using Windows 3 1x This section details first time installation of the GRIDLINK software If you already have a previous version of GRIDLINK installed refer to Section 1 6 6 Upgrade Procedure on page 1 22 To install the GRIDLINK software on a personal computer perform the following steps 1 Insert the GRIDLINK disk in the 3 5 inch floppy drive
181. ialog box displayed A dialog box can have one or more of the following components Parameter with a value field Parameter with an option field Pushbutton standard only List box The first three components also appear in function screens and are described in Section 1 5 4 Rev 9 99 1 13 GRIDLINK User Manual The list box is typically used to select a file or a point parameter If a list box has too many entries to fit inside its borders a scroll bar is provided on the right hand border of the box This scroll bar can be used to move the list one item or one page at a time by clicking the scroll bar with the mouse Keys that are active in the list box are explained in Table 1 1 Some dialog boxes may have linked list boxes where the selection in one list box controls the list being viewed in the next If the item you need is not shown in a linked list box check the controlling list box for additional lists that may contain the item 1 5 6 Help System The major help features in the GRIDLINK software are The Help menu Context sensitive help The Status Line Table 1 1 List Box Key Functions Key Function In List Box Up Arrow 1 Highlights the field in the next line above Down Arrow J Highlights the field in the next line below Page Up Displays previous page of choices if any Page Down Displays next page of choices if any Enter Selects item in hi
182. ield al Active field attribute a2 Non active field attribute a3 Unavailable field attribute a4 End cap attribute a5 Blocked text attribute a6 Up Down Spinner Buttons a7 Drop Down Button COLOR14 Default Numeric Entry Field al Active field attribute a2 Non active field attribute a3 Unavailable field attribute a4 End cap attribute a5 Blocked text attribute a6 Up Down Spinner Buttons 1 34 COLORI5 Default Scroll Bar al Active field attribute a2 Non active field attribute a3 Unavailable field attribute a4 End arrow attribute a5 Border attribute a7 Shadow attribute COLOR17 Default Edit Box al Active border attribute a3 Normal display attribute a5 Non active border attribute COLORIS Default List Box al Border attribute a2 Non active highlight bar attribute a3 Normal item text attribute a4 Active highlight bar attribute a5 Unavailable item text attribute COLOR19 Default Menu al Border attribute a2 Check mark attribute a3 Normal text attribute a4 Highlight bar attribute a5 Available key normal a6 Available key and check mark highlighted a7 Unavailable attribute for all text key and checkmark COLOR21 Template Radio Button al Marker active attribute a2 Text normal attribute a3 Text unavailable attribute a4 Text normal when active a5 Text unavailable when active Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual
183. iginating from the Low Pressure Point data and using the load profiles at the District Regulator the GridBoss system predicts system requirements to improve system integrity and reduce the average system pressure The LPP GridBoss 602 measures the average line pressure at the Low Pressure Point downstream from the District Regulator The average line pressure at the Low Pressure Point and the required change in Setpoint for the regulator is relayed back to the District Regulator GridBoss 601 when the LPP pressure goes out of range Rev 9 99 1 5 GRIDLINK User Manual The GridBoss controller has a weather tight enclosure with a window for a Liquid Crystal Display LCD display which is further protected by a weather shield cover This display consists of a 2 line by 16 character alphanumeric display to monitor information stored by the GridBoss units The enclosure contains a processor circuit board with built in input output I O including mounting provisions for batteries a radio power converter and an I O card The built in I O consists of a direct 4 wire Resistance Temperature Detector RTD interface and a discrete output Additionally the District Regulator includes two discrete inputs two pulse counters two user configurable pulse or discrete inputs two discrete outputs two analog inputs and one analog output An optional intrusion switch uses one of the discrete inputs The GridBoss system can be operated peer to peer between t
184. igure A 2 TH Parameters Cycle Time B Count 188 Count Low Reading El High Reading El 10 EU Value Uni tz Percent Figure A 2 Timed Duration Output The output pulse from the TDO function must be defined for proper engineering unit EU conversion The minimum pulse width 0 Count and the maximum pulse width 100 Count define the minimum and maximum ON time of the output pulse The values entered in the 0 Count and 100 Count are the number of seconds the output is ON Example A TDO is used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 1000 MCF per day flow 0 Count 3 seconds 100 Count 12 seconds A 2 2 Defining The Engineering Units The engineering units EUs are defined by entering range values that correspond to the 0 Count and the 100 Count These values are entered in the Low Reading EU and High Reading EU fields A 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Example A TDO is used to emulate a field instrument measuring flow The TDO outputs a pulse width of 3 seconds for no flow and a pulse width of 12 seconds for 1000 MCF per day flow 0 Count 3 seconds 100 Count 12 seconds Low Reading EU 0 High Reading EU 1000 A 2 3 Accuracy Resolution The accuracy of the output depends upon the sample rate of the GridBoss typically 50 ms and the width of the maximum pulse For the preceding example the accu
185. ile Menu Before Connecting 2 2 Figure 2 2 File Menu After Connecting 2 2 Figure 2 3 GridBoss Directory Group Selection 2 4 Figure 2 4 PC Comm Parameters Group Dialog 2 5 Figure 2 5 GridBoss Directory Advanced Features nt 2 7 Figure 2 6 Save File Dialog 2 11 Figure 2 7 Open Menu Options ooocococccconncnonncnnne 2 13 Figure 2 8 Open File Dialog BOX cooooocccnc 2 13 Figure 2 9 Open Event Log File 0 0 eee 2 14 Figure 2 10 Collect GridBoss Data 2 15 Figure 2 11 Locate TOD Profile PRN 2 17 Figure 2 12 Excel PRN Import 1 of 3 2 17 Figure 2 13 Excel PRN Import 2 of 3 2 18 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Figure 2 14 Excel PRN Import 3 of B 2 18 Figure 2 15 TOD Profile in Excel oo 2 19 Figure 2 16 Select Number of Logs oooooccnnccc 2 20 Figure 2 17 Disk Config to GridBoss Selection for a District Regulator cceesccessceeeeeeeceeceeeneeeees 2 22 Figure 2 18 TOD Profiles ooooccnnnccnonccnonccnnnns 2 23 Figure 2 19 New or Existing Backup 2 24 Figure 2 20 Update Firmware Open File Dialog EER ENA E letra lic 2 24 Figure 2 21 Update Hardware Backup 2 25 Figure 2 22 Saving Hardware Configuration 2 26 Figure 2 23 Configuration Selection for a District Regulator coi naaa 2 26 Figure 2 24 Updating Hardw
186. imum Output Hasimim Cutt 15 jal trae ing nl FID an Reset Disable Disabled Enabled k Enabled Low Hattery Voltage Limit ne W on Hattery Voltage Limi Wold bs 3 Mia Mutilei Press Point Fail Low Limit 3 Qutlet Press Point Fail Migh Limit eg Dance 5 Dutput Deviation Headband Figure 3 8 Tuning for Analog Output Type 3 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Proportional Gain Proportional Gain is the ratio of the change in output to the change in input Outlet Pressure based on the control action in which there is a continuous linear relationship between the output and input An initial Proportional Gain setting of 0 01 is recommended to avoid loop instability The default value is 0 01 Integral Gain Integral Gain is the ratio of the change in output to the change in input Outlet Pressure based on control action in which the output is proportional to the time integral of the input An initial Integral Gain setting of 10 is recommended to avoid loop instability This value is in terms of repeats per minute The default value is 10 Derivative Gain Derivative Gain is the ratio of the change in output to the change in input Outlet Pressure based on control action in which the output is proportional to the rate of change of the input An initial Derivative Gain setting of 0 is recommended to avoid loop instability The default value is 0 Scale Factor A number representing the ratio of the output
187. in The first six history points that remain selected display on the History screen 7 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 7 4 MINUTE HISTORY Select History from the menu bar and then choose Minute The Minute History database option displays the values for history points other than FST controlled logged in the GridBoss for the last 60 minutes in one minute increments from the current minute The District Regulator samples ambient temperature regulator inlet pressure regulator outlet pressure output signal to the Kixcel Kixcel position and battery voltage once a second The DR then stores one hour of minute averages to the Minute Historical Log The Low Pressure Point samples the low pressure point value and battery voltage once a second The LPP then stores one hour of minute averages to the Minute Historical Log The values are always displayed with the most recent value first Refer to Figure 7 5 imit yss Ikldress gaij pss Tine Deal ando 1a 39 9 56 26 Operator APC Hirwte Inner Loop Diff Pres Inner Loop Inper Loop iran Loop THPAL AVG Fb RUG PRSVAL AWG OTL AWG a Lu le A TA a reen AAA HEHEHE HUEBEE BUBB BUBB AA AA ARDADA HABA GAD GAGGIA ERA 0 ORAR 0 AAA 494150 493150 4 3150 49 _ F158 49 _ F158 493150 49 3150 49 3158 493150 49 3150 49 3158 A GABAA A BABAR 0 BABABAD a apami DAA REE EEE EEE ala E Lonn Figure 7 5 Minute History You can use the pushb
188. in a hierarchy to guide you through GRIDLINK Figure 1 2 on page 1 13 shows the overall menu structure called a menu tree for GRIDLINK The names in the menu tree are listed as they appear in the software NOTE Not all menu items are active or appear as options Certain functions are restricted depending on the type of GridBoss unit and other hardware you are using Menu items that are not active appear in gray and cannot be accessed Other menu items specific to a function do not appear at all To use the mouse in the screens and dialog boxes click press and release on the field you want to change For option fields clicking on an option selects it marking it with an asterisk For text and number entry fields that can be edited click on the field to highlight it Use the keyboard to enter the required characters Note that you can move most dialog boxes by dragging them with the mouse To drag a dialog box place the pointer on the top border of the box press and hold the left mouse button the border turns white then move the mouse When the box is where you want it release the button Rev 9 99 4 11 GRIDLINK User Manual To use the mouse to activate a pushbutton just click on the pushbutton To highlight a pushbutton without activating it such as for viewing the pushbutton s Status Line information click the mouse button over the pushbutton which highlights drag the mouse off the pushbutton and then releas
189. io 4 2 Average Raw Values ccccccoonocconcccnnonoonaccnnnccnnnnnns 4 7 Calibracion ed 4 7 CUPPA E ehea e O ae ee ee a 4 7 Configurations asic aiid edi a a aah 4 2 Elton ein ah cl et oad oe ae 4 6 Hick Alli da 4 5 High High Alarm ooooonnocccnonncnoncninnonncnnnononccnonacinnoss 4 5 High Reading EU 2 iets cig eae me 4 3 Low Alai ta 4 5 Low Low Alami eeen a i e e A e a 4 5 Low Reading EU srr e a aaeei 4 3 Mont cita a 6 16 Pot Tas tries albino 4 3 LN A TO 4 5 II cee seetavadsas cuss 4 6 Scan Period cacao anaes 4 3 O 4 3 Temp CompensatlOM oooconoccconncnonncnonananccnonnncnnnccnnne 4 7 UNIS adi ctas alado icia 4 3 Valle iri E E T aR 4 3 TN 7 5 IN A iohendatheayga deities 7 5 Alarm Codec alone ad aE 6 17 Alarm File AEM ea n E ea ale nee 2 12 Alarm Option Sassan E R aea 3 7 RBX eui nrar a T ES 3 4 3 8 Alarming eins bio 3 7 Alas presa 3 3 3 7 3 17 AGV nerens 3 3 3 7 3 23 4 4 4 13 4 16 Alenen e ATE TE NEEE E EE aY 4 4 Collect GridBoss Data ooooononccnnnnnnnnnncnono o 2 14 2 19 l 1 GRIDLINK User Manual TT 4 17 O iri ae a ite tie eae ees 7 15 All Collect GridBoss Data ooooocnnoccccnnoocccnnooccnnnnnnncnnnno 2 14 aN A EEE E hale eats adatieos 1 10 ALTIX idol E Ra AEN 1 10 2 30 Ambient Temp sstsiiiyicisstatsecoudanksisorskiatastaadaseis faeiaaos 3 13 Ambient Temp Fail oonoocnnncnnococnncccnoncconncnonccnonacinnaconno 3 7 Ambient Temperature ooooocnonccnoncnonncionancnnnconaninnnccnnncnno 7 3 Ame
190. io lid 3 15 DAY e aea et tebe SR Questia nein eet isa ia 7 5 Day Hist Vitoria eevee ecto ene A eae hee 7 11 DB A cect SA Re cotta sd eet eee G 1 DEDA ta da ano a soo ee Ne G 1 Deadband Time Delay for DRS ooooonnoconocinocccncncnnnnono 3 22 Default Operator ID e an 1 28 8 1 PasS WO ti td 1 28 8 1 Default Directory iveco 2 20 DetaultiOutpltracti tet eae eee 3 11 Default Setpoint inenen e E 3 11 Del ita ie A 9 14 Derivative ici Ste AR eek 3 17 Derivative Gainon E a EE 3 11 a cisien nan a a 5 14 Rev 9 99 DI Accumulated Value ccccsssteeesseeeeeeeteeeennees 4 19 Advanced Features ooooooocccnoooncnononcnnnonnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnos 4 18 Aldo alas 4 17 ALAS r a A ORAA RAAE 4 17 Confisurations yeaa eaan EET 4 15 DIN horp A AA REEE 7 5 Diseret pulsiones id 4 15 O TON 4 18 Erlter Intervalo aitor 4 18 InpPUt ocioso ET 4 19 A a E T E 4 16 Mo itor aeann a a tat ceiesearedserdescelesennes 6 14 Off Counter nren ER E E 4 19 On Coltrane 4 19 Point Number seenen n 4 16 SCA niren aie di dee ei aaa 4 17 Standards O devotions 4 16 Slats n EE E E air tie a ane 4 16 Laia 4 16 Dial Command nsere enn a R E n E 2 9 Dial g Boxes cocaina 1 13 Dial Ea 2 8 DIN eee eg 7 5 PY PO wiacen ceeted ectetensesd coeds avacdus Send cevbesutecusccutoessecunse 4 16 Direct Connes a a a a 2 3 DA n a oh ae E E 2 20 Disabled 3 4 3 8 3 20 4 5 4 14 4 18 4 29 7 6 9 19 Disconnect Ti oooooocnnoocccnoooccncnononcnnnnnncononnncnnninnnnos 9 1
191. is 9600 baud Parity Parity checks to be performed by the communications controller The default value is None Data Bits The number of data bits contained in a character The default value is 8 Stop Bits The number of stop bits contained in a character The default value is 1 RBX Mode External Comm ports only not including LOI If you are using the RBX Alarming feature alarm call in select Enabled and then use the RBX Features or Advanced Features pushbutton or Advanced Features to configure the Comm Port to support RBX activity Key On Delay Defines the number of seconds in 0 01 second increments to delay before turning the RTS signal on once a valid message has been received For some older radios the Key On Delay may need to be set as high as 0 2 second For newer radios designed for data transmission no more than 0 02 second should be required 10 millisecond increments are used Key Off Delay Delay intervals defining the period to delay before turning the RTS signal off once a valid message has been received The turnaround time of 0 01 second should be sufficiently long for most radios 10 millisecond increments are used Rev 9 99 9 11 GRIDLINK User Manual Valid Receive Ctr The Valid Receive Counter logs the number of valid Opcodes received by the GridBoss on this communication port This counter can be preset to a value or cleared Modem Refer to page 9 12 RBX Features Refer to page
192. is a difference in I O points you may have to record your macro again Macro Key This reflects the keystrokes required to play the macro CTRL plus the key you select plays back the macro you record Select a key to use with the CTRL key Macro File Name Enter a name for the macro you are recording or use the default file name The extension should always be mac Rev 9 99 8 5 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 3 2 Play Macro Use the Play Macro function to play a predefined macro After choosing Play Macro select the macro you desire to play and press OK The macro plays back You can also use the hot key you established in the Macro Key option when you recorded the macro to play back a macro Refer to Figure 8 4 File Hame C ROCL INK Files MACRO1 MAC Figure 8 4 Play Macro 8 3 3 Stop Recording This function stops recording the action or sequence of events that you are performing 8 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 3 4 Example Macro This section provides an example macro used to perform a Cold Start which restores the configuration from programmable ROM clears the Alarm Log Event Log Grid Displays FSTs and History This example also creates a hot key for the operator to press to start the macro By using this macro an operator can quickly perform the Cold Start function on multiple GridBoss units CAUTION The Cold Start macro reloads all restart configuration data and also clears logs display
193. is associated and LPP Group assigned to control this DR The default value is 2 NOTE If the LPP Address and LPP Group entered here do not match the DR Address and DR Group of the LPP that controls this DR the DR ignores the commands 3 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual DR Port to LPP Select the communications port at the DR This is the communications port the DR uses to communicate with the LPP The default value is COM1 Alarms You can either enable or disable limit alarm logging for the Low Pressure Point controlling this DR If you enable Alarms the RBX Alarm Options pushbutton becomes active The LPP Communications Fail alarm is the only alarm that can be logged to the Alarm Log If you disable Alarms no alarm logging is generated for this LPP regardless of the alarm configuration The default value is Enabled Last LPP Comm Time Displays the last date and time the Low Pressure Point Controller had valid communications with this District Regulator Last LPP Press Value Displays the last average low pressure for the minute Avg Low Press Value point value read at the LPP Last Setpoint Change Displays the last change in Setpoint received from the LPP DR Setpoint at Last Comm Time Displays the state of the Setpoint and Control Output at the District Regulator Controller when the last communications with the LPP occurred Within Limits DR is within the Setpoint and Control Output limits Ma
194. istory POlMt ooonocccnonccnonocccnoancnonononccinnccnonacnnno 7 4 SelectNe Wisin a ids cid 7 8 Sensor Modules iaa tdo dadas G 4 Servo Val aci lc E EE E N dos opa 1 5 Setpoint iii ii 3 5 3 21 Setpoint Deadbandd oooooccnnocinocononcccnonononnnononacionacinnass 3 21 SETA o e ed o ess da ees 7 5 Setting the Internal Clock oooonnnccnnnccnooccconcnonaccnancnn 9 2 DOE add 7 1 SERRA a A e See A R 6 8 6 9 Shift Taba nae nat e e A de Glee 1 9 Soft PON S erie adn dl EEEn dd ee G 4 Softkeys Refer to Keys or Pushbuttons ooooononccnonncncnnncon 1 10 SOMO Mi dl A RAE 5 6 Software tees ina Leto la delos eb 1 6 Update Firmware ocooooncononcnnonnnorcorononenonncnnone toreros 2 23 Software Disk cid oh Meee 1 15 Software Installation 1 18 1 20 1 21 1 22 Space Delimited Spreadsheet 00 0 0 eee eeeeseeeseeeeeeee 2 28 SPDBND atando iaa ea 7 5 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual S Preddshe Cti cicistssesadasteassistasscthasrstistaasihea hoa 2 28 O A TRA E i 7 5 SRAM noaea E ah G 4 SRB X aeua a e e ATR G 5 Standards T aT a E aaa Ea 4 16 Start COny r nEn a e aia 2 29 Start TIME s 25 i a EE EREA a 5 9 Starting GRIDEINK srai aaa eie 1 28 Starting the GRIDLINK Software ooooocccnocccnocncnnnnnos 1 27 Startup Default Security iesnu irar 1 28 8 1 Station Names 9 3 STATUS ras e a T OEA o 7 5 Status ie iii 1 14 1 15 Stop BllSiciusiaiantaas tanto 9 11 Stop Recording umi ai 8 6 SLOP SCAN ii 6 13 Store and For
195. ites a E A a ee 9 4 Enter on a deen a T ed 1 14 Error De dba d ns anru hiiren naia 3 11 Error Time Delay for DRS oonooccnocnnocccconccnoncnonccnnannss 3 22 l 4 Errors Connecties ieee Te a aaea 2 3 2 7 TAME OUt eih aa Aasa 2 7 OE E T E A 1 10 BU R E A T 7 5 G 2 EU Values treaa T a EE A 2 Event File SEV ED AEE EA E T 2 12 EVENS ciraire Taaa EE EATE RAEES 7 13 Events Alarms Collect GridBoss Data coccconnnnnnnnnnoninconnn 2 14 2 19 Exec Del ui e 5 4 Ext nih ative hii ASS 2 30 Extensions s es 2 4 2 12 2 15 2 16 2 20 2 27 A 6 12 7 9 7 10 7 12 7 13 7 15 Extra Key On Delayer a a 9 14 F El Update iia da 1 10 END Virada 1 10 ES Nexte an n aia 1 10 FA COPY dara 1 10 ES Pasta asia 1 11 Eb Canceliniaia iaa raro 1 11 ES SV iia aaa 1 11 FInd aa a dae R 1 10 FIO ale dada 1 10 Figures Figure 1 1 Sample GRIDLINK Display 1 8 Figure 1 2 Menu Tree for the GRIDLINK Software E 1 13 Figure 1 3 Copy DisK oooonocccnoncnonccnonccconncannnn n 1 17 Figure 1 4 Start Copy Disk 1 17 Figure 1 5 Enter New Disk 1 18 Figure 1 6 Install Screen 1 19 Figure 1 7 Installation Complete Screen 1 19 Figure 1 8 PIF Editor for Windows 3 1x 1 23 Figure 1 9 GRIDLINK EXE Options 1 24 Figure 1 10 GRIDLINK EXE Program 1 25 Figure 1 11 GRIDLINK EXE Properties 1 26 Figure 1 12 Operator Log On Display 1 28 Figure 2 1 F
196. itial File menu before you connect to the GridBoss Use macros to record a sequence of keystrokes that you perform You can then replay the sequence of keystrokes on demand by using a hot key that you assign before recording the sequence of keystrokes The macro options are Record Macro Play Macro Stop Recording Refer to Section 8 for detailed instructions on creating macros 2 15 EXIT ALT X Select Exit under the File menu to exit the GRIDLINK program If you are currently connected to a disk file the file will be closed If you are currently connected to a dial up GridBoss the hang up command will be issued to the modem When you select Exit the GRIDLINK software quits running and disappears from the screen Alternately you can use the Alt X key combination when in the majority of screens to perform the same action 2 30 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 3 THE GRID MENU The Grid menu allows you to set up parameters that are used to communicate between the District Regulator DR controller and the Low Pressure Point LPP controller as well as to establish parameters for the control loops The Grid menu is different for the DR and the LPP units The following information is included in this section Information Section Page Number omm with LPP 3 1 3 2 Regulator Control 3 2 3 5 RBX Alarm Options 3 2 1 3 8 T O Definitions 3 2 2 3 8 Adaptive 3 2 4 3 13 Holiday Dates 3 3 3 15 RBX Alarm Option 3
197. load Configuration oocococcconcnonnnnonnnoncninnnaconanccnnne 2 20 User Interfaces inai el teat teen 1 7 Dial s BOXES Lanata tantas 1 13 Function Screens ooooocononcccnoncncnnonncnonnnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnos 1 12 Help Systems o ini siviinks einen Ra ey 1 14 Keyboard 1 8 Menu Bar and Menus ccoconoccnnnnonocnnnnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnno 1 8 OC aa 1 7 Pointing Devices ccooocccnocccnonncnonccnonaconncconacinnncinnncnn 1 8 User List SetU Dynia a RE 5 13 l 11 GRIDLINK User Manual Using A a AE 10 2 Utilities Menu ccccsssssssccccceccceeeessvsscvessccceeeeenseees 8 1 Calibration Values occccccnnnnncccnnncnononinnnnninccnncnonos 8 9 GridBoss Memory ccoocccnocccnonncnonncnnonanononcnnnccnnnccnnnacos 8 8 MACTOSs 3 2eceiistecc tate at e oie Las le edo a e 8 5 SEU nel 8 1 Security GRIDLINK Operator cooooooccnonccccnoocnnnnnn no 82 V Valid Receive ClT occccccnnncnnnnncccncconononinnnonicccncnnnnnonono 9 12 Value Description WindoW cccoocccnocccnonccnonccnonaconnanonos 6 8 Value on Power Reset oc oooccccnncccncnnoconcnnnccnnnnaconannnos 4 14 Value to Archive oocccccnnnnnccccnnnnnnnnnaniocicononononanicicoconono 7 4 Version sas EE llos od rd a ad o e Ed 9 6 Version Name ccccccnnnnnnnnnccncconononanineninrcncnnnononnnonaniniccnn 9 5 Version Number ccccccccccccsseeeessssseeecseeecccsseeeseees 5 12 Viewing TOD Profiles arisen a 2 16 NRACTR eater e EAE R 7 5 W X Warm Start eene orne pinnene ra E
198. ly History File Ons ILS 0 kefimi Lior un ingle Motivo Pushbutton HEA lodato L Fa hance Lig E enon Status Line Figure 1 1 Sample GRIDLINK Display From the menu bar you can use either the keyboard or the mouse to activate a menu and then to select a function in that menu 1 5 3 Keyboard and Pointing Devices There are two methods for telling the GRIDLINK software what to do the keyboard method and the pointing device method The pointing device can be a mouse a trackball or other device Throughout this manual the term mouse refers to any kind of pointing device you may have NOTE A DOS or Windows mouse driver must be present in your system to use a mouse 1 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual A mouse or trackball is usually easier to use than the keyboard for getting around in the menus and screens However the keyboard is still required to enter text and numerical data If you only have a keyboard you can perform all the operations of the mouse method but it may not be as fast as using a mouse and you need to learn which keys are required for each operation 1 5 3 1 Using the Keyboard If you are using the keyboard and the menu bar does not have one of its items such as File highlighted use the Alt key or the F10 key to activate the menu bar Use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys to highlight the menu bar item you want note the help Status Line at the bottom of the screen provides a brief description of
199. mation screen in Section 9 Valid entries include 1 247 If the PC running GRIDLINK is connected directly to the operator interface LOI port on the GridBoss a GridBoss Group of 240 and a GridBoss Address of 240 the default values allows access to the GridBoss no matter what Address and Group are configured in the GridBoss For a Host port COM1 Port on the GridBoss the configured GridBoss Address and GridBoss Group used by GRIDLINK must match the Address and Group configured in the System Information screen Refer to Section 9 PC Comm Port This parameter selects the communications port on the Personal Computer to be used by GRIDLINK The communications port is only for the setup currently selected in the Comm List For successful communications the PC Comm Port set up in GRIDLINK and the COM Port set up using the Control Panel on the Personal Computer must match The GridBoss can communicate through COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 of the PC depending on your computer s configuration Your computer s serial port COM Port can be altered from the computer s Control Panel For a Host port COM1 Port on the GridBoss the configured GridBoss Comm Ports settings used by GRIDLINK must match the Host port set in the remote Personal Computer Refer to Section 9 2 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual IRQ This parameter selects the hardware Interrupt Request IRQ setting on the Personal Computer The IRQ must not conflict with the
200. modem cable be correct Refer to your hardware manual concerning LOI cable pin outs To connect the computer to a remotely located GridBoss controller a serial or dial up modem communications line must be installed The Host and remote GridBoss units use COM1 Whether the computer running the GRIDLINK software is connected locally or remotely the communication ports on the computer and the GridBoss must be configured similarly The computer s communications port is configured using the GridBoss Directory function described in Section 2 4 The GridBoss communications port either LOI or COM1 is configured using the Comm Ports function in Section 9 5 The Host communications is configured using the Comm Ports Modem function in Section 9 5 1 If the ports on both the computer and the GridBoss are configured properly then a Connect command causes the computer to begin communicating with the GridBoss For connecting to a GridBoss locally using the Local Operator Interface port use the Direct Connect option of the File menu to establish communications The Connect command causes GRIDLINK to initiate communications with the GridBoss by performing a search of the PC communication ports at various baud rates GRIDLINK locates the first Comm Port and Baud Rate that are successful in communicating with a GridBoss See the Direct Connect function in Section 2 3 for more information For connecting to a GridBoss remotely through the Host port COM1 or to
201. ning Disabled a value can be entered to override the input The default value is 13 5 Units A 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the analog input For example PSIG inches or volts Scan Period The amount of time between updates of the Filter value Refer to AI Advanced Features on page 4 6 The default value is 1 second All Analog Inputs are updated based on their individual Scan Periods Low Reading EU The engineering unit corresponding to zero percent input For example if a temperature transmitter is connected to the analog input with a range of 40 degrees F to 160 degrees F the Low Reading EU would be set to 40 High Reading EU The engineering units corresponding to 100 percent input For example if a temperature transmitter is connected to the analog input with a range of 40 degrees F to 160 degrees F the High Reading EU would be set to 160 Scanning The Scanning options let you enable or disable scanning for this point For the input to process the field input it must be Enabled While Scanning is Enabled the Value parameter indicates the current input reading When Scanning is Disabled it effectively places the input into Manual Mode An alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Alarming You can either enable or disable limit Alarming for this point If you enable Alarming the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband are configured and displayed in the Alarms dialog
202. nniccccnnnnnnnnnnnonaninocos 3 22 Comm PoltS ccoooccnnnnncnnnnccnnnnoccnnnnonancnnonanrcnonanccnanonos 9 10 RBX Features oocccccnncccnnnnccnnnnnoccnnncononcnnoronnnnoroninos 9 13 Comm Tacos inicien 9 11 Comm with LPP ccccnnnncncnnncnnnnnonnniciccnnnnnnnnninocccnnnnns 3 2 COMM DIR a e e ens 2 4 Comma Delimited Spreadsheet ooooonccnnnnnnnnncnnncnonnos 2 28 Communication Problems cccccccnnnccccnnnnnnoninananonos 2 10 Communications PE Sti 8 is Pie eeoa RT 9 20 Communications with the LPP ooccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnoci 3 2 Compare AA A edee a oee Ea ian Ene 5 5 Computer Requirements ooooccconcconncnoncnonnnnonnnonananannne 1 15 COME a ohio ees 2 3 Config Command cocococccnonncnonononcnionaconnnnonancnnanccnnccnnne 9 12 Configurable Opcode Table oooooonnnccnonccnoncccncnnonns 5 11 Configuration cccooocccnoncnnnnonnononanonnno 1 4 1 31 2 11 G 1 Duplicado n 1 32 EPP and DR cotton otto donadas 2 12 Connecting Command cooocccnnnnnnnnnnnnenicnoccnnnnnnonononaniococonnnnononononono 9 12 Connect E E E ER E E 2 5 j B1 TRO To a E A EE 2 3 2 7 Local CommunicatioNS oooooconoccccncnnnnnnnnnnnuccnnnnns 1 30 Remote Communications ooocccccnnnnnnnnininncccncnnnnno 1 30 IRT AE di ds Beas da E a Le 9 13 To the GridBosS cccccccnoccnnnnnononccccnonocononononaninicos 1 30 Context sensitive HelP ooooonnnccnonccnonccccnonnccnnon 1 14 10 2 Contract HOUT ooocccnncnnnccnnonoccnnonococcnnonoconnonaronnn
203. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnononononononononononos 3 3 Prev Eat ltda ate cetro tata il 1 10 Primary Loop Scale Factor iina e A A E E AT aa 3 17 Print Configuration oeiee igitiir 2 29 Process Variable oooooonnnnnnonnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnrnononono 3 5 3 21 Product Overview ooooooooooonononononononoconoconncnonononononos 1 4 1 5 Profile Locked occccccccccnnncconononnnanannnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnns 6 19 Proportional iuris 3 17 Proportional GalM ooonoccnnococnnonnninncnononcnoncnnnnccnanccinnoss 3 11 PRS VAT uta sa 7 5 PST Nite G 4 A A TOA G 4 Pulsa ida G 4 Pulse Inplts ent iii G 4 PUSHDUON a a ativan ce oa ene 1 8 PU aa G 4 R RIRs ta ei be a ee ER 7 5 O A 2 8 Radio Power Control ooooonononononoccnonononcnnnnononoos 5 7 5 9 Radio Power StatUS ooooooonnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnononos 5 9 RAM ina deste arose Bets 1 6 G 4 AATE ae a Ee 7 5 Raw D A OUtpUtoooooccnnnoncccnnonancnnnonnnnnnnoncnccnnancnncnnnnanos 4 13 RBX aaa hides ones 5 10 G 4 Alarmi indek a na n Los boe tues ATE 9 14 Alarm OPtIONS ooocccoocccconncconnncnnnnss 3 4 3 8 3 18 3 20 Alarmni S cuela leas 4 5 9 18 9 19 Example incaico ls 9 16 Features tata td da eL a 9 13 Mode tii dto 9 11 O Wa id 9 16 RBX on DR Comm Alarms ccccccnnnoccccnnnnnnnnnononnnns 3 20 RBX on LPP ALIIS Aina es NE 3 4 RBX on LPP Comm Alarm occcccnnnnncnccnnnnnnnnninonnnons 3 4 RBX on Output Deviation coocononccconcncnnnccnonccnnncns 3 8 SEALS ad AR eR ecto 9 14 Re
204. nonaconos 9 4 Control Loop Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Monitof eat ltda 6 19 Control Loop Modes Selecting the Type sisin arnan aas 3 6 Control Outputs ici ipiranga 3 6 Control Palaos aiii i a dana 2 5 A Seas seeussctadaguecasdsisecaes 6 19 CONVETL vce seiaiccs EEE es A RRE TRS 2 27 Copy DSK ee saiia tc lalola RET 1 17 DISKCOPY iruetan altri ai 1 16 Fco toleran AE 1 10 Copy DISK sio pr nE E ass 1 16 Copying Display Dala oooooonnnncnonccnoncccnnonncnnncnonacinnnss 6 10 CRE Ch ck areenan a 9 9 CSAS omita G 1 CURRAW comia ine a ie 7 5 Current TOD Value o oo eee eee cceeseeeceessneeeeesaaees 3 14 Current Valla iba 7 6 CURRN T saio renen e a a a E N AaS 7 5 Customer Namen nr iE E E EE TN 9 5 Cycle Time cocicnnionicnnodoniiancion id redonda EE E A 2 D Daily Historical LOgS oocooooccnnnoncconononccnnonancncnonnncnos 7 11 Daily History File oooonnocnnnnccccnnocncononccnnonancnoninnnnnos 2 27 DAY uta eich elaine 2 12 DATA aiii aa 7 5 Data 1 to 16 cuisine diia 5 14 Data Fl tod20 encinas 5 6 Data 1 to 44 oo eeeeeceseesneseeeceseseneeseseteeseners 5 12 Data 22 to HA noires e ip ees an ak ek Ee 5 12 Data Bils nen ea r E TAN 9 11 Data Held ia 1 8 Data Meliana ii ido iaa 5 1 Configurable Opcode Table oonoocnnccnonccnoncccnnns 5 11 A tts se evbbvsie preva beete ss 5 2 FST Editors tosis eo Poses bes stuie be fev aea Oa ESEE 5 5 SOMPOMES sisi sitiado 5 6 User List Setipinna e otoi aea 5 13 Date of Hold esoo l
205. noncccnoancnonncnonacinnoss 2 27 POB il ocaenoss nantes eR 2 12 662 Kixcel Remote Control Pilot Drive Actuator See Kix cel cccccccccsssssssvssovssvcccceeeeseeessvssevccsensnes 1 4 A About Menu ltelW oooccnnnncccnnnnocononicnnnnnnioconannnccnnnanos 10 5 Absolute Pressure AP Ae Be est tie het ol e Ne en eR A G 1 ACTO de ae 2 3 ACCUM ai iaa 7 5 Accumulate ni dt Daevecenateseguvers 7 6 Active Alarms 00008 3 7 3 23 4 4 4 13 4 16 4 22 Active LPP Alarms occccccnnnnnnocnnnnnnanoconocononcnnnananininons 3 3 ACUVE ZN it ad Es 5 9 Adaptive Ninas aiii 3 7 Adaptive Errotarria sesioa p iio SR Ee 3 14 Adaptive Gdl cinc olci aio ii 3 13 Adaptive Mod er inssi oreha inicie sii 3 6 Rev 9 99 Additional Information ooooconnnonoconnnnonocnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnno 1 4 Address iii ia 2 8 9 4 Address and Group cccooccconccnononnnnonncconanonccnonaconnccnnnc n 2 6 Adjusted D A 0 coooooococccconccconcnncnonccnonanonccnonccnonacinnnos 4 13 Adjusted D A 100 oooooonccconocccnonncconnconnononccconaconnnos 4 14 AERROR iodo 7 5 AGA Nvidia lod calce ies ba 7 5 AI Actual CM cias da ie 4 6 Adjusted A D 0 coooocononccnonncnonnncnnanncnnnononccnonacinnoss 4 6 Adjusted A D 100 oocoocononccnonccconocncnonnconncconcconnnos 4 6 Advanced Features ccsccssscceceeeseeeeeeeneeeeseenees 4 6 AlN copii io EE EET 7 5 Alarm Deadband aineina oireet au ae 4 5 TO 4 3 Alaris osito lei ds 4 4 Analog Inputs erisa n i ra a Res
206. nput desired for the test value and is the actual value expected by the test equipment being calibrated against For example when calibrating temperature for an RTD input enter the degrees value associated with the resistance set up in the decade box 4 Press the Log Verify pushbutton Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each value to be verified 5 Press the Cancel pushbutton If calibration is needed proceed to Step 6 otherwise press the Done pushbutton 6 Press the Calibrate pushbutton Refer to Figure 4 4 and to Section 3 3 4 for details 7 Calibrate the zero value 0 of range for the Analog Input Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units and press the Set Zero pushbutton Refer to Figure 4 6 Point Analog input Dead Weight Tester Value Og Live Reading d Figure 4 6 AI Set Zero 4 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 Calibrate the span value 100 of range for the Analog Input Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units and press the Set Span pushbutton Refer to Figure 4 7 Point Analog input Dead Weight Tester Value Live Reading 99 Figure 4 7 Al Set Span 9 If desired calibrate Midpoint 1 such as 25 of range for the Analog Input Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units and press the Set Mid 1 pushbutton Refer to Figure 4 8 Otherwise use the Done pushbutton and proceed to Step 12 Set Hidpoint 1 Point Analog input Dead Weight Tester Value Li
207. nt Tag ID is a parameter of an Analog Input point Parameters are normally edited by using configuration software running on a PC PC Personal computer PI Pulse Input PID Proportional Integral and Derivative control Point Software oriented term for an I O channel or some other function such as a flow calculation Points are defined by a collection of parameters Point Number The rack and number of an I O point as installed in the ROC FloBoss or GridBoss controller PSTN Public switched telephone network PT Process Temperature PTT Push to talk signal Pulse Transient variation of a signal whose value is normally constant PV Process variable R RAM Random Access Memory In a ROC it is used to store history data most user programs and additional configuration data RBX Report by exception In a ROC it always refers to spontaneous RBX in which the ROC contacts the host to report an alarm condition RFI Radio frequency interference RI Ring Indicator modem communications signal ROM Read only memory Typically used to store firmware RTD Resistance Temperature Detector RTS Ready to Send modem communications signal RTV Room Temperature Vulcanizing typically a sealant or caulk like silicone rubber RXD Received Data communications signal S SAMA Scientific Apparatus Maker s Association Sensor Module The SM provides static pressure inp
208. nt values from the GridBoss 8 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 8 5 CALIBRATION VALUES Select Utilities from the menu bar and then choose Calibration Values The screen that appears in Figure 8 6 lets you view all the calibration values for a specific point such as the Tag Changes in the values cannot be made from this screen this should be performed by using the Analog Input function To calibrate refer to the Section 4 AI Calibration id 170 Data Mise lora mjii igs Tales H Lal erat bar Tag Aus Pres Raw Value 1 g Raw Value 2 20695 Raw Value 3 21695 Raw Value 4 29695 Raw Value 5 21695 EU Value 1 6 ORR EU Value 2 0 BORE EU Value 3 0 ORE EU Value amp 0 BORER EU Value 5 2 BABES Press Effect 0 parran Set Ell Value 08 0irarin Marmal EU gt MONA Timer Mode A Type A Figure 8 6 AI Calibration Values Use the F2 Prev and F3 Next pushbuttons to view the calibration values for the other calibrated points The values that display for each point are Tag Raw Values 1 to 5 EU Values 1 to 5 Pressure Effect Set EU Value Manual EU Timer Mode and Type Note that some of these values do not necessarily apply to each point Rev 9 99 8 9 GRIDLINK User Manual This page intentionally left blank 8 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 9 THE SYSTEM MENU 9 1 SCOPE This section describes how to view and configure system level information for a GridBoss The
209. nternal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display to save I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 4 3 1 AO Advanced Features When you use the Advanced Features pushbutton in the Analog Outputs screen shown in Figure 4 11 a dialog box appears that lets you configure features such as resetting and RBX Alarming for the analog output Refer to Figure 4 12 Raw WA Qutput Adjusted WA 6 Adjusted D A 108 l p an mes Reset bi Alarm Set amp Clear DW R tetain Last Value Co Figure 4 12 Analog Outputs Advanced Features Raw D A Output The current reading directly from the digital to analog converter The D A value sent to the AO is the Raw D A Output The default value is 800 Adjusted D A 0 The value decoded by the digital to analog converter for zero percent output This value is also used to convert the output to engineering units The default value is 800 Rev 9 99 4 13 GRIDLINK User Manual Adjusted D A 100 The value decoded by the digital to analog converter for 100 percent output This value is also used to convert the output to engineering units The default value is 4000 Value on Power Reset When Low EU is selected the Value parameter is cleared upon a reset of the GridBoss such as a power restart or a Warm Start and the Low Reading EU is used as the new Value If Retain Last Value is selected the last output value is used after a reset I
210. ntroller The default value is OK DR Control Status Refer to page 3 19 RBX Alarm Options Refer to page 3 20 After configuring an LPP and pressing F8 Save use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display This saves the configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 3 18 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 4 1 DR Control Status The DR Control Status dialog displays the current status of the currently selected District Regulator Controller DR Control Status Last Setpoint Change 0 0000000 DR Setpoint at Last Comm Time Within Limits Last DR Control Mode Manual Last DR PID Calc Status Enabled Figure 3 12 DR Control Status Last Setpoint Change Value of the last change in the Setpoint sent to the District Regulator DR Setpoint at Last Comm Time Status of the District Regulator Setpoint or Control Output during the last communications with the LPP This field also tracks the Control Output If neither the District Regulator Setpoint or Control Output is at a limiting value this field states the situation If neither the District Regulator Setpoint or Control Output is against a limit Within Limits displays Within Limits DR is within the Setpoint or Control Output limits Maximum Limit Setpoint or Control Output at maximum limit Minimum Limit Setpoint or Control Output at minimum limit Last DR Control Mode
211. numeric characters including spaces may be used Status The Status field is both an indicator and a control As an indicator it shows the state of the discrete input OFF normally indicates that the input is OFF or that a switch is open ON normally indicates that the input is ON or that a switch is closed When Scanning is Disabled Manual Mode the Status can be changed by pressing the Status ON OFF pushbutton or by pressing the Enter key when the Status field is active and then performing a Save Note that the state of the input is reversed by selecting Inverted in Advanced Features Scan Period The calculation period namely the amount of time between updates as specified in seconds for the Scan Period The default value is 1 second Active Alarms This field indicates any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear If Alarming is Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled DIN Type The options listed let you select how you want this discrete input to function Standard Select Standard if you want the Discrete Input status to follow the actual field input Latched Select Latched if you want the Discrete Input status on an active transition of the input from OFF to ON to change to ON and rem
212. numeric characters including spaces may be used Output Type The type of output that controls the Kixcel can be either an Analog Output AO or a Discrete Output DO If the Discrete Output is used two DOs Timed Duration Output TDO must be used One DO is used to raise the Kixcel and the other is used to lower the Kixcel Outlet Pressure The Outlet Pressure you are controlling at the District Regulator This is the current value of the process variable which is determined by the input definition I O Definition The value is used for comparison to the Setpoint The default value is 0 Setpoint The Setpoint around which the Outlet Pressure process variable is controlled When in Manual Mode you may enter a value to be in line with the Outlet Pressure so there is not a harsh bump at startup The default value is 0 Rev 9 99 3 5 GRIDLINK User Manual Control Output Desired output to the Kixcel I P or servo valve This can be an Analog Output or a Discrete Output This should be the same value as the Output Feedback Output Feedback Actual output of the Kixcel I P or servo valve This is the exact position of the Kixcel I P or servo valve as returned by an Analog Input This can only be used if the Output Type is an Analog Output Change in Output This is the amount the control loop changed the output to the Kixcel in the last control calculation For an Analog Output the Change in Output is add
213. nute increments primarily used with cellular telephones For each Radio Control point the power cycling can be configured to automatically change three times a day During each of these three periods called Zone 1 Zone 2 and Zone 3 the ON and OFF times can be set up to operate at various intervals to conserve battery power Figure 5 6 is a graphical depiction of how the power control operates within each time zone Host Communication Detected On Off Time On Hold Time Off Time Time Time Zone 1 Zone 2 Figure 5 6 Radio Power Control Timing During the ON time Receive interrupts are enabled on the COM port The power output is switched to ON Communications may occur During the OFF time Receive interrupts are disabled on the COM port The power output is set to OFF Communications may not occur If communications occur during the ON time the ON time is extended by the Hold Time The power output remains ON and receive interrupts remain enabled for the duration of the Hold Time When the Radio Power Control parameter is Enabled radio power cycling is activated The Low Battery Shutoff parameter allows power cycling to be automatically disabled whenever the input voltage to the GridBoss falls below the specified threshold Tag You can enter a 10 character name to identify this power control point with its respective communications port The default value is PwrCtlTagl
214. o not import column Skip GridBoss Addressl GridBoss Group2GridBl 9 9 52 Operator APC Figure 2 14 Excel PRN Import 3 of 3 Figure 2 15 displays the PRN file in Excel 2 18 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual gt east IA C Figure 2 15 TOD Profile in Excel 2 7 3 Events Alarms When you select Events Alarms the Collect GridBoss Data function saves all 240 events and 240 alarms Events under are saved under the FILENAME EVT and Alarms are saved under FILENAME ALM 2 7 4 History After selecting Collect GridBoss Data from the File menu and selecting History the Collect GridBoss Data function saves 15 minute and daily data for all parameters configured in the history database up to 15 When you select History the Save File dialog box displays as described previously Change the current File Name or accept the default name and press OK Next a dialog box for selecting the number of logs displays Refer to Figure 2 16 Note that 840 logs are 96 15 minute logs stored each day times 8 75 days If you wanted just the past 2 days of 15 minute history you would multiply 96 times 2 to get 192 logs Enter the number of logs you desire to collect and press OK Rev 9 99 2 19 GRIDLINK User Manual There are total 840 logs how many do you want to save 840 Figure 2 16 Select Number of Logs 2 8 DOWNLOAD Use Download in the File menu to create a back up copy of the
215. o not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one so no false alarms generate NOTE The Low Battery Voltage Limit AI point number El and the Outlet Press Point Fail Low and High Limits AI point number A2 can be set to send RBX alarms using the AI point Alarming options The alarms should be set slightly beyond the range of the transducers If a pressure transducer electrically shorts or opens the signal goes beyond the 4 to 20mA range and triggers the RBX alarms 4 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Low Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the input must fall to generate a Low Alarm The default value is 10 High Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the input must rise to generate a High Alarm The default value is 110 LoLo Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the input must fall to generate a Low Low Alarm The value is set lower than the Low Alarm The default value is 20 HiHi Alarm The limit value in engineering units to which the input must rise to generate a High High Alarm The value is set higher than the High Alarm The default value is 120 Rate Alarm The value in engineering units that represents the maximum amount of change allowed between updates Refer to AI Scanning If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm is generated To disable this Rate Alarm without disabling the other alarms the Rate Al
216. o the DR Controller File Heter 10 Data Di i i tilities System Help Point Humber B 1 Tag AD Def lit Value Units Low Reading El High Reading El 2d ad Disabled i isabled ener ill Active Alarmas Hone Advanced a _ Pej Cancelly E Saucy Figure 4 11 Analog Outputs The F4 Copy and F5 Paste can be used to save configuration time by allowing you to copy data from one configuration screen to another of the same type NOTE If you make changes in the display and then try to quit without saving the changes a message box pops up You can either press Enter to return to the display or press ESC to discard the changes and exit the display Save changes by using the F8 Save Rev 9 99 4 11 GRIDLINK User Manual Point Number The Point Number indicates the location of the point such as rack and module number in the GridBoss The Point Number is automatically assigned by the GridBoss and cannot be edited Each analog output has a unique Point Number to identify the output Each AO point must be individually configured Refer to Section 4 7 Input and Output Point Numbers on page 4 32 If there is more than one point of this type available in the GridBoss you can page to the other points by using F2 Prev and F3 Next One Analog Output is available at Point Number B1 and is physically located on the I O card Tag Enter up to 10 characters to identify the point being defined in this screen
217. o update the current display 5 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual F2 Prev Displays the previous Softpoint F3 Next Displays the next Softpoint F4 Copy Copies the values of the current display F5 Paste Places the values of the copied display into the current display F6 Cancel Cancels all actions since the last save and closes the currently selected display screen F8 Save Saves the configuration values in the current display to the GridBoss 5 4 RADIO POWER CONTROL Select Data from the menu bar and then choose Radio Control A display appears similar to the one shown in Figure 5 5 Battery power is conserved by cycling power to the radio or cellular telephone only when power is required Radio power is controlled at the switched power terminals on a EIA 232 communications card File H A t Radio Power Status On Active Zone alt Time Alaa a On Time Secs a OFF Time Secs Hold T Lon Battery utaff mT TL Volts Power Timer Seconds Remaining On Counter Seconds OFF Counter Seconds Update cal Ea Figure 5 5 Radio Control Radio power is controlled by the DTR signal through the COM1 port on an EIA232 communications card Rev 9 99 5 7 GRIDLINK User Manual Two modes of Power Control are possible Seconds and Minutes In Seconds mode the time base for the timers is in 0 1 second increments primarily used with radios In Minutes mode the time base for the timers is in one mi
218. ollowing steps 1 Create a backup copy of your GRIDLINK installation disk as explained previously 2 Insert the GRIDLINK disk in the 3 5 inch floppy drive 3 Type A at the DOS prompt where A is the location of the floppy drive in the previous step 4 Type Install and press Enter The screen shown in Figure 1 6 appears 1 18 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Fisher Controls International Field Automation Sis tems GRIDLIW CTA Configuration Software Installation Witlity o install GRIDLIKE enter the desired drive and directory or use the default a Then tab to the Install pushbutton and press ENTER or click on it LC ad ROSE ote 1 1 wou are conning GEIN IHE under Hina or Al see the GRIDLINE User awal Section 1 For instructions on how to sat the idle sensitivity lote 2 If you ore running GRIDLINE under Windows 3 1 of Winds and GRIDLIME is to be installed ta a directory other than C W6RIM IHE please modif the PATOL INK PIF fale to have the right directory name largat Director A GATDI T els Figure 1 6 Install Screen 5 Type ina new Target Directory if you want to install the software in a directory other than the default C GRIDLINK The GRIDLINK default directory is recommended 6 Press the Install pushbutton Note that the Cancel pushbutton cannot be used after the installation utility begins When installation is complete the screen displayed in Figure 1 7 appears Fis
219. opped when the Host clears the RBX alarm The default values are Retry Count 1 1 Retry Count 2 2 and Retry Count 3 3 For example if you set Retry Count 1 to 2 Retry Delay 1 to 10 Retry Count 2 to 1 and Retry Delay to 20 then after the first unsuccessful attempt to communicate with the Host the RBX Features would try two more times after waiting 10 seconds each time and once more after waiting 20 seconds Delay Three Delays are possible Delay 1 Delay 2 and Delay 3 Delay defines the delay in seconds between attempts to transmit an RBX message Note that there is a Delay parameter associated with each Retry Count parameter Refer to the previous example The default values are Delay 1 20 Delay 2 30 and Delay 3 45 Extra Key On Delay Defines an additional amount of time to delay transmitting an RBX message after turning the RTS signal on Enable the parameter and then specify the number of seconds This parameter is used for radio communications RBX Alarm Index This is a read only parameter that indicates alarms currently being reported through RBX RBX Status This is a read only parameter that indicates the status of RBX messaging either Active or Inactive Active indicates that an RBX alarm is being processed 9 14 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Host Address and Host Group Enter the Address and Host Group number of the Host to which the RBX feature is
220. ordingly Refer to Section 9 5 Comm Ports on page 9 10 for parameter details 9 16 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual If a modem link is being used make sure that the modem parameters are properly configured Pay special attention to the dial out parameters for the Connect Command Host telephone number and the Connect Time Refer to Section 9 5 1 Modem on page 9 12 for detailed information on each parameter NOTE Modem parameters are accessed by pressing the Modem pushbutton All parameters on the GridBoss Comm Ports screen must match those of the connected radio telephone modem or serial communications device File Grid 0 Moto Uyanan History lilisies Susten Help Comm Tag Crem Comm Foard Installed pal a Bits ai Bilis Bods 20 iE isobled i de les W pi hana IN g iE penisa Kew On Delay 9 01 Secs Valid Receive Ctr i Key DFF Delay 8 091 Secs Hao dong FER Features li Fi Update 21 ire y li Nos igl ITF a E FS Pas E li F lane oly a Enter a 18 character identifier for this port Figure 9 10 Configuring the Basic Communication Parameters 9 6 3 Configuring the Communications Port RBX Parameters The next major step is to set up RBX for the Host communications port Enable the RBX mode and then set up the RBX parameters Start by selecting Comm Ports from the System menu to display the GridBoss Comm Ports screen as shown in Figure 9 10 In the Comm Ports screen select Enabled for the RBX
221. ory points to save the log or to print it Use the Select New pushbutton to display history points other than the first six Use the Save pushbutton to store the entire log in a disk file that you specify Use the day extension when saving the Daily History log file This file can be viewed or printed later using the Open option in the File menu Use the Print pushbutton to immediately send the entire log to a connected on line printer The log prints out up to six history points to a page Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 7 7 EVENTS HISTORY Select History from the menu bar and then choose Events Refer to Figure 7 8 The Events History log option displays the event database The Event Log records changes to the configuration of the GridBoss The event function records the last 240 occurrences of parameter changes power on off cycles system initialization program downloads and FST directed events Refer to Section 7 8 for viewing alarm events You can use pushbuttons to change the time order of the log save it print it or view Use the Invert pushbutton to change the order of the log default is newest to oldest and return to the first block of the log in its new order Use the Save pushbutton to store the entire event log in a disk file that you specify Use the evt extension when saving the Events History log file This file can be viewed or printed later using the Open option in the File menu Use the Print pushb
222. oss MPU Loading Displays the percentage of time that the processor was busy not in the wait task over the last minute The data for this field is updated approximately every minute Press the F1 Update pushbutton to view the new value The default value is 7 67 9 3 2 Revision Information The Revision Information pushbutton is available in the main System Information screen The Revision Info screen always displays the Firmware Version number and any other accessories which may be connected to the GridBoss Refer to Figure 9 4 Revision Info District Regulater Hot Used Part Number Ween Part Humber Version 8040 Version 1 0 Expansion Board Hot Used Part Number H48057 Part Humber Version 00A Version Pressure Module Mot Used Part Number 420234 Part Humber Version Version En Figure 9 4 Revision Information District Regulator or Low Pressure Point Type of firmware installed in the GridBoss Controller Not Used When this field displays Not Used no accessory is installed This field displays the name of an accessory if one is installed For example this field may say I O Expansion Board or Turbine Interface Part Number Part number of the accessory or firmware Version Version control number of the accessory or firmware 9 6 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 4 FLAGS Select System from the menu bar and then choose Flags Refer to Figure 9 5 The GridBoss System Fla
223. ould be present during the On Time that a radio is active Some of the On Time is also used by the radio during power up initialization of the receiver causing part of the On Time to be unavailable for receiving requests Refer to Table 5 1 for a typical configuration of the Radio Control feature for a GridBoss and a Host with a 25 duty cycle Table 5 1 Typical Power Control and Host Configuration GridBoss On Time 2 seconds Radio Power Control Enabled Off Time 6 seconds Seconds mode Host Key on Delay 250 milliseconds Key off Delay 10 milliseconds Number of retries 13 Time between retries 350 milliseconds 5 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual After configuring the Radio Control points press F8 Save and save the configuration to programmable memory using the Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss System Flag screen 5 5 OPCODE SETUP Select Data from the menu bar and then choose Opcode Setup A screen appears as shown in Figure 5 7 The Configurable Opcode utility is used by certain Host computers to group data for more efficient communications The data for the Opcode is normally configured by the Host through the communications channel This utility is used for checking and editing Opcode configuration Care must be taken to assure that any changes will not corrupt data for the Host A Host device uses Opcodes request information from the Grid
224. ow Pressure Point Controller use the parameters in this screen to setup information concerning the DRs with which the LPP communicates Some of these parameters include the DR Tag name DR Address DR Group and telephone number of the LPP Refer to Figure 3 11 A LPP Controller can communicate with up to five District Regulator units and each DR must be configured Use the F2 Next and F3 Prev keys to display each DR BR Tag DH 1 OR Address Ci DR Group A Force Update Cleary Duter Loop Tung Cow aS Proportional Gain 0 01000 Enabled Enabled Integral Gein 14 a Disabled abi ed Derivative Gain Scale Factor DR Connect Command ATT lt nunmber gt DR Retry Time 15 Secs Humber of Completed Calls E DR Retry Count 3 Last DR Come Time 0000 40 00 00 00 DR Communication Status OK DR Control Status REX Alarn Dp ti onsi Figure 3 11 Comm with DRs DR Tag Name of the District Regulator Controller with which you desire to communicate Enter up to 10 characters to identify the DR being defined in this screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used Each DR Tag must be unique for each District Regulator with which you are communicating DR Address Address of the District Regulator Controller with which you desire to communicate DR Group Group with which the District Regulator Controller is associated and with which you desire to communicate The default value is 2 Force Update To force t
225. ows Complete and the pushbutton reverts to No use the Update pushbutton to view CAUTION When a Write to Internal Config Memory is performed all user flags are maintained at their current status during this process and all incoming communications are temporarily suspended FSTs are temporarily suspended but restart where they were suspended Write Status When the pushbutton for Write to Internal Config Memory is Yes most configuration settings including the current states of the GridBoss Flags and calibration values are loaded into programmable ROM upon performing a save as the new restart configuration When the loading is complete the Write Status indicator on the next line of the display shows Complete and the pushbutton reverts to No use the Update pushbutton to view The write process can take from a second to a minute or more for a large configuration Set RTS High for 30 secs Set the pushbutton to Yes and then press F8 Save to activate the RTS Request to Send signal for either the local operator interface port LOI or the COM1 port The RTS signal turns on for 30 seconds The pushbutton reverts to No use the Update pushbutton to view CRC Check Select Enabled to perform CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check checking on serial communications T O Scanning When Enabled I O is in normal scan mode When Disabled all I O scanning is stopped and the last values are used until the scanning is resumed
226. places any changes made since the last save NOTE The time stamp in the GridBoss reflects the time at the end of the period not at the beginning Data collected from 0800 to 0900 is time stamped 0900 not 0800 In the spring the historical log skips an hour and in the fall a duplicate time value will be entered 9 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 3 INFORMATION The System Information options define values for certain system variables and the Address and Group that differentiates each individual GridBoss Other system variables set in the System Information screen must be established for a particular application To set the variables select Information from the System menu The System Information screen displays system information about the GridBoss including firmware flash version numbers and various other installed options The GRIDLINK software responds with the display in Figure 9 2 NOTE If you make changes in the display and then try to quit without saving the changes a message box pops up You can either press Yes to save the changes or No to disregard the changes File Grid 10 Mata I Nyse gy MALT des Sacto Hehi ea ormation Station Home BridEoss District Ha Gridikoss Type DR fiddress T 113 eel oe Group a qt is ry ps tise Contract Hour 4 E Hetrid ICA Disable Force End of Day Cleary Firmae mE Hoevision mE daid te EE richer station i Figure 9 2 System Information Station N
227. put that is non continuous typically representing two levels such as on off DO Discrete Output DMM Digital multimeter DP Differential Pressure DR District Regulator DTR Data Terminal Ready modem communications signal Duty Cycle Proportion of time during a cycle that a device is activated A short duty cycle conserves power for I O channels radios etc DVM Digital voltmeter Rev 9 99 G 1 GRIDLINK User Manual E EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM a form of permanent memory EIA 232 Serial Communications Protocol using three or more signal lines intended for short distances EIA 422 Serial Communications Protocol using four signal lines EIA 485 Serial Communications Protocol requiring only two signal lines Can allow up to 32 devices to be connected together in a daisy chained fashion EMF Electro motive force EMI Electro magnetic interference ESD Electronic Static Discharge EU Engineering Units F Firmware Internal software that is factory loaded into a form of ROM In the ROC FloBoss or GridBoss controller the firmware supplies the software used for gathering input data con verting raw input data calculated values storing values and providing control signals Flash ROM A type of read only memory that can be electrically re programmed Itis a form of permanent memory needs no backup power FM Factory Mutual FSK Frequency
228. r Manual Select History Point In the list box select highlight the history point you desire to configure The parameter currently configured if any for this history point appears in the Value to Archive pushbutton Note that for the GridBoss the first eight history points are pre configured as described above and cannot be changed by the user begin selecting history points with History Pt 9 Value to Archive Activate the pushbutton under the Value to Archive label to specify a Point Type and Parameter to be archived Refer to Figure 7 2 Undefined Point Tag Id Discrete Inpuls Time On Discrete Oulpuls Status Analog Inputs Hace Analog Outputs Alarm Pulse Inputs Accumulated Val ROC Flags Wind ts ROC Comm Ports Cycle Time System Variables 0 Count fof 4 156 al Miel cla Figure 7 2 Archived Value First determine the Point Type to archive by highlighting it in the left most scrollable list If you want to keep this history point from logging values select Undefined as the point type Next in the middle scrollable list select the exact Point Type Location Parameter or the Logical Number For example in an Analog Input point type you might select AIN A 2 Refer to Table 7 3 NOTE Interpret the information on the Value to Archive pushbutton for example AIN A 3 EU in the following manner The first part is a three character mnemonic in this example AIN means Analog Input that indicates the Point
229. r to Figure 4 17 and Appendix A TDO Parameters Cycle Time Secs 0 Count Secs 100 Count Secs Low Reading EU High Reading EU EU Value Units Figure 4 17 Timed Duration Output Parameters Cycle Time Applicable only to the TDO Toggle mode of operation The Cycle Time defines the total time of one cycle the sum of the ON time and OFF time in seconds After a cycle has been completed a new cycle is initiated The default is 15 seconds 0 Count The count in seconds that represents a zero percent output pulse width The default is 3 seconds This is the minimum amount of time that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Set the 0 Count to a value that allows movement but also provides good resolution of control 100 Count The count in seconds that represents a 100 percent output pulse width The default is 12 seconds 100 Count is the maximum amount of time that the TDO can be energized to move the motor Normally this is the amount of time it takes for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed Low Reading EU The engineering units value corresponding to the 0 Count This is the low reading EU The default value is 0 High Reading EU The engineering units value corresponding to the 100 Count This is the high reading EU The default value is 100 EU Value This parameter applies to a discrete output configured in the TDO or TDO Toggle mode When a value is saved w
230. racy in percent is sample rate 50 ms accuracy x 100 x 100 0 42 percent max pulse width 12 sec A 2 4 Time On The Time On field is located in the main Discrete Outputs screen Refer to Figure A 1 The Time On field is calculated from the entered EU Value and the previous definitions of 0 Count 100 Count Low Reading EU and High Reading EU entered in the TDO Parameters screen Refer to Figure A 2 The calculation formulas are EU Span High Reading EU Value Low Reading EU Count Span 100 Count 0 Count Entered EU Value x Count Span On Time 0 Count A 2 5 TDO Modes There are three modes of operation possible with the TDO function A single pulse output Timed Duration TDO A single pulse output and toggled continuous pulse output Toggled A continuous pulse output TDO Toggle Rev 9 99 A 3 GRIDLINK User Manual A 2 5 1 Timed Duration TDO The single pulse output plain TDO is enabled through the GRIDLINK software by selecting DO from the I O menu Refer to Figure A 1 Select Timed Duration TDO in the DOUT Type field The single pulse output can be triggered by writing to the Status or the EU Value parameter of the DO point This can be accomplished directly by a PID point or by an FST A 2 5 2 Toggled The single pulse output toggled TDO is enabled through the GRIDLINK software by selecting DO from the I
231. re to perform a calibration after it is Enabled Clipping When Enabled the software forces the Filtered EUs to stay within the range defined by the cutoff limits Set the cutoff limits by using the LoLo Alarm and HiHi Alarm parameters 4 2 3 Al Calibration The AI Calibration pushbutton allows you to calibrate the Analog Input displayed in this screen Perform the following steps to calibrate an analog input CAUTION During calibration the GridBoss will time out and disconnect if it is left idle for extended amounts of time Your calibration values will be lost and you must reconnect and to begin calibration from the beginning 1 Press the AI Calibration pushbutton A dialog box displays as shown in Figure 4 4 and the analog input is automatically frozen at the value displayed in the dialog box AI Calibration Freeze Value 20 00000 Calibrate Figure 4 4 Al Calibration Rev 9 99 4 7 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 If the input has been calibrated before you can verify the calibration this can also be done immediately after performing calibration Press the Verify pushbutton to proceed with verification of an input s calibration Refer to Figure 4 5 and to Section 3 3 3 for details Otherwise skip to Step 6 to begin calibration Werify Calibration Point Analog input Dead Weight Tester Value sO Live Reading O Figure 4 5 Verify AI Calibration 3 Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value This is the i
232. receiving Host device On Alarm Set amp Clear In either condition a Report by Exception message generates and sends it to the receiving Host device After configuring RBX functions use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display to save I O configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 4 Flags on page 9 7 Rev 9 99 9 19 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 7 COMMUNICATIONS OVERVIEW The GridBoss system consists of LPP units DR units and a Host computer system Both the LPP and DR units communicate with the Host Computer Communication can be originated by the Host computer or by the LPP DR units as an RBX Refer to Section 9 6 Configuring Report by Exception on page 9 16 The LPP can communicate with up to five DR units Each DR contains information about the LPP that validates the communication In each LPP the System gt Information screen is used to enter the Station name Address and Group of the LPP Refer to Section 9 3 Information on page 9 3 The System gt Comm Ports gt Modem screen is used to enter the Host telephone number Connect Command Refer to Section 9 5 1 Modem on page 9 12 In each LPP the Grid gt Comm with DRs is used to configure the DR Tag name DR Address DR Group and telephone number to the DR DR Connect Command Each DR must be individually configured Use the F2 Prev and F3 Next pushbuttons to view each DR configuration The Comm wi
233. red file in the Files list and then press Enter or press OK If the desired file is not listed you can use the scrollable list box on the right to select a drive and directory that has the file you desire Note that the root directory of a drive is indicated simply by two periods The current drive and directory are displayed below the File Name field pen File File Mame Epa 7 C WERTOLIHE Files Director yeDr jua DR POB nia ll Ep eo ream Help A Figure 2 8 Open File Dialog Box Rev 9 99 2 13 GRIDLINK User Manual Note that the File Name field merely indicates the types of files currently being listed in the Files list 1t cannot be used to enter the name of a specific file After selecting an Event Alarm or a History file type the data displays in the same format as live data Refer to Figure 2 9 File Grid LD Data Tine Downloaded 4 1 99 A Date 04 11 99 Mister be 50 a pista Utilities System Hel r ri Hoss District hg Operator RPC B 15 Type I0 Dld Value Hew Value HIN Fl APC Disable APC Disable APC Disable As APC Disable Initialization Sequence Log A lime Description Alarm ep rae Ae Hode All Power Remove FLE 41 APC Disable Unicef Grice DAC 1 APC OFF 11 02 10 Clear EEPROM D0 Control Status ORC 1 APC Shutdown COM 8 APC 09 Undefined AIH E1 APC AIH El APC AIH B2 APEC Valid Rs Ctr Raw A D Input Filtered EUs Raw AFD Input h B4 Ba Do 11
234. rican Gas Association O O G 1 ANAlO iii sd G 1 Analog puts icceisnathvaveikn aiden aie G 1 Analog OutpUltS inen en a E G 1 AD 7 5 Advanced Features occoococcnooncnnoncnonononcnnnncnononinnnnoss 4 13 Alamin aia 4 13 Analog OUtpUt cococonnnonccccnonncononannnonnnccnnnnccnanancn nno 4 11 AOU ati 7 5 High Reading EU oococccnnccconccconcccnnononcninnanccnonacnnne 4 12 Low Reading EU oooncccnocccionccnoncnonccionanonncnonacinnnss 4 12 Monitorer cirio 6 17 Point Number oocooooccnnnonccononcnnnonnnonnnncconnncnonnnnnnonnnos 4 12 SCANIA aes eh ci 4 12 AEN vices sbuadunccus swede aves Sen coud cous aabotea covdeveh cubeden cove dees 4 12 WITS 230s eect ie aah ee ete 4 12 Valle iia Wht al A a ee ees 4 12 APO aida G 1 Archive TypPesciotaniciio nai 7 6 Archived Valle nia aa 7 4 ATT OWS wi sok cocks secant eat E AEEA ERE A EAEN OES 1 14 ASCID sik ian Acc nae es Ae lathes G 1 Auto Scat sii adenine a 6 13 AV OLAGE 2 s seca ssincene poate dol einen eae ETETA SNe Tap TEE 7 6 Avg Low Press Value ooononcconnnoccccnnonconcnnoncconnnnnnnos 3 22 A IE 7 5 B Backup Configuration ooconocccnoccnooncnnnononcnnnncccnoncninnnss 2 21 Backup Diskka ahei sos semea orian e e a 1 18 Battery Power Controlling oocoonncccnonccnonccnonccionnnonno 5 7 Baud Rate iio tia as 2 6 9 11 Black and White Monitors cceseceeeeeeteeeeeeeees 1 35 Built in VO ae G 1 C Calc da 3 7 Calibration AY on Ri et Ae sitet ia is
235. ritten to this parameter the discrete output is activated according to the magnitude of the value The amount of on time that a given value represents is determined by the scaling from 0 Count 100 Count Low Reading EU and High Reading EU The default value is 0 Rev 9 99 4 23 GRIDLINK User Manual Units A 10 character name for the engineering units assigned to the TDO output The default value is Percent 4 5 2 DO Advanced Features Use the DO Advanced Features to set a value for the Accumulated Value parameter and establish Clear on Reset response Refer to Figure 4 18 Accumulated Val Status on Power Reset Ep _ Retain Last Status Figure 4 18 Discrete Outputs Advanced Features Accumulated Val Accumulated value is the number of ON to OFF transitions of the discrete output The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a maximum count of 4 294 967 295 The accumulator can be preset by entering the desired value or cleared by entering zero The default value is 0 Status on Power Reset When set to Off the Status parameter is cleared and set to OFF upon a reset of the GridBoss such as a power restart or a Warm Start When set to Retain Last Status the last output value is used after a reset for the Status The default value is Retain Last Status 4 24 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 6 Pl PULSE INPUT CONFIGURATION Select I O from the menu bar and then choose PI Pulse inputs PI are pul
236. roperties Figure 1 9 GRIDLINK EXE Options 3 Click the Properties option as displayed in Figure 1 9 to display the GRIDLINK EXE Properties dialog 4 Click the Program tab Refer to Figure 1 10 5 Enter the directory path where you installed GRIDLINK in the first field For example if you installed GRIDLINK in the C F TSHER GRIDLINK directory enter C FISHER GRIDLINK in the first field Refer to Figure 1 10 6 Enter GRIDLINK EXE in the Cmd line field 7 Enter the directory path where you installed GRIDLINK in the Working field For example if you installed GRIDLINK in the C F ISHER GRIDLINK directory enter C FISHER GRIDLINK in the first field Refer to Figure 1 10 8 Click Apply 9 Click OK 10 Refer to Section 1 6 9 Using Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT on page 1 25 1 24 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Gridlink exe Properties E General Program Font Memory Screen Misc GRIDLINK Cmd line Gridink exe Working CAFISHERAGRIDLINK Batch file Shortcut key None Run N ormal window Close on exit Figure 1 10 GRIDLINK EXE Program 1 6 9 Using Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT When using GRIDLINK under the Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT DOS prompt it may be necessary to adjust the Idle Sensitivity setting of the GRIDLINK EXE file 1 Select highlight the GRIDLINK
237. ructions for more information Hang Up Command ATZHO where 3 second pause send escape code to modem ATZHO disconnect and perform software reset Rev 9 99 2 9 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 4 2 Establishing GridBoss Directory Groups The GridBoss Directory option allows you to select from a previously defined group of communication setups This option allows the GRIDLINK program to talk to individual GridBoss units and to add delete or modify these setups You may also create new groups of GridBoss units The following section details establishing GridBoss groups and individual GridBoss communications setups 1 Select GridBoss Directory from the File menu Refer to Figure 2 2 2 Select the group File Name in the Files field for the group you desire to alter or select the default COMM DIR Refer to Figure 2 3 3 Enter all Personal Computer communications information and Advanced Features if necessary Refer to Figure 2 4 and Figure 2 5 4 Press F8 Save 5 Press Connect to establish a connection 2 4 3 Communication Problems Occasionally you may need to alter your GridBoss Directory options when you are having problems communicating with your GridBoss 1 Select GridBoss Directory from the File menu Refer to Figure 2 2 2 Select the group File Name in the Files field for the group you desire to alter or select the default COMM DIR Refer to Figure 2 3 3 Select an existing file in the Comm List
238. s Comm Fail use the GridBoss Directory feature to establish a connection to your GridBoss Refer to GridBoss Directory on page 2 4 The GridBoss Directory option allows you to change your communications port time out settings and other variables used by the GridBoss units when establishing a communications link to your computer A Comm Fail can also occur if the GRIDLINK software stands idle for too long In this case simply log back into GRIDLINK using Direct Connect or the GridBoss Directory feature Rev 9 99 2 3 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 4 GRIDBOSS DIRECTORY The GridBoss Directory option allows you to select from a previously defined group of communications setup files that allows GRIDLINK to communicate on a personal computer to an individual GridBoss unit You may also add delete or modify these communication setups and create new groups of GridBoss units The GridBoss Directory communications setup files are used for setting communications for a computer connected to the GridBoss Directory communications can use the LOI COM1 or Phone Modem port at the GridBoss The configuration in the GridBoss Directory must match the communications configuration in the PC The GridBoss Directory is used to setup personal computer PC communications ports COM ports The GridBoss Comm Ports and System Information screens are used to set up communications for the specific GridBoss and not the PC Refer to Section 9 On startup GRIDLINK
239. s and FSTs In addition it may cause output changes load new accumulator values and disable user program tasks and User Data Types Generally a Cold Start should not be used on a GridBoss that is actively gathering data and performing control Save or document all required data and parameter values that could be affected before performing the Cold Start NOTE If you are currently connected to GRIDLINK F8 Save any data that you have currently changed o Y N 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Rev 9 99 COPAN AA No Logon to GRIDLINK From the File menu press the Right Arrow gt six times to select the Utilities menu Press the Down Arrow J to select Macros and press Enter Press Enter to select Record Macro Type a letter to use with Ctrl as your Macro Key hot key For example Ctrl A Press Tab three times to use the default Macro File Name of macrox mac Press Enter Press Enter to select Yes and override an existing Macro File Name if necessary Press Alt to select the File menu Press the Right Arrow gt seven times to select the System menu and press Enter Press the Down Arrow J two times to select Flags and press Enter Press Tab to select Cold Start and press Enter Press the Down Arrow J five times to select Restore config and clear all of above and press Enter Press Tab to select OK and press Enter Press F8 to initiate a Save Press Esc after the Save is complete Press th
240. s or comparison values you establish One FST may be configured in a GridBoss unit The FST may consist of as many functions as can fit into the memory reserved for the FST Reserved memory is pre determined by the GridBoss An FST 1s built from a library of commands that provide mathematical and logical operations database access operations testing and branching operations and control related operations For information on library commands refer to the Function Sequence Table User Manual Form A4625 5 2 1 FST Parameters Select FST in the Data menu and then select FST Register to display the screen shown in Figure 5 1 The FST Register option is used to monitor the operation of FST Parameters and to enter initial Register values without going into the Monitor function of the FST Editor utility When you select FST Register a screen appears showing the various FST Parameters that can be monitored or initialized 5 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual File Meter I 0 Data Display Histor Uti FST Parameters Tag sd FST Status Register Register Register Register Register Register Register Register Register Register Advanced Features F1 Updatej CF2 Prey CFI Next CF Copy CFS Paste F Cancel F8 Save Figure 5 1 FST Parameters FST Registers Point Tag The 10 character name identifying the FST Register point FST Status The current status ON or OFF of the FST associated with this FST Registers point
241. s Line The Help menu provides on screen information about getting started with the GRIDLINK software performing keyboard operations using the Help index and displaying the GRIDLINK Version number For more information on context sensitive help and the Status Line refer to Section 1 To get help using the menu structure select Help from the GRIDLINK menu bar or press the letter e when nothing but an activated menu bar is displayed Select an item in the Help menu A help screen appears on the screen If there is more information than will fit in the help window use the Page Down and Page Up pushbuttons at the bottom of the help screen to view additional of the information You may also use the text scrolling keys to view information For information on accessing help for using keys refer to Section 10 3 on page 10 3 To leave the Help window and return to where you were use the Cancel pushbutton or press the ESC key Rev 9 99 10 1 GRIDLINK User Manual 10 2 GETTING STARTED To acquire help on Getting Started with the GRIDLINK software select Help from the menu bar and then choose Getting Started A Help dialog box appears as shown in Figure 10 1 This dialog box provides details on using Help and using the GRIDLINK menus GRIDLINK software by selecting Help from the menu bar and then choosing Getting Started A help dialog box appears with the following information USING HELP To display the help file for a menu i
242. s displays on the computer monitor and the computer keyboard and or pointing device The major components of the GRIDLINK user interface are e Menu bar and menus affected by the security system Function screens Dialog boxes Keyboard and pointing devices Help system including the Status Line and message boxes ee e The previous user interface components are presented in Sections 1 4 Section 1 5 1 is an overview of the user interface 1 5 1 Interface Overview The GRIDLINK software employs a character based graphical user interface with a standard Windows menu structure After logging on to GRIDLINK you see the available functions displayed in a menu bar with pull down drop down menus Refer to Figure 1 1 A Status Line at the bottom of the display contains pertinent information about the highlighted item such as a menu option or a parameter Refer to Figure 1 1 The menu structure displayed in Figure 1 2 lists choices from which you can select the desired function Some items when selected display another menu that lists additional functions Once a function is selected the screen or dialog box for that function displays This screen or dialog box provides the requested information and allows you enter the applicable configuration data A typical screen displays parameters and pushbuttons as displayed in Figure 1 1 Some parameters have values while others have options Values are contained in data fields next to the param
243. se can be configured to log only the values that need to be logged The values are logged in the standard minute hourly daily time base of the GridBoss unless FST control is used By using the FST Editor utility the period in which the data is logged can be placed under program control NOTE The time stamp used for standard logging of historical values reflects the time at the end of the period not at the beginning For example data collected from 8 00 to 9 00 is time stamped 9 00 Rev 9 99 7 1 GRIDLINK User Manual Four types of historical databases are maintained by the GridBoss controller Min Max Database Minute Database 15 Minute Database Daily Database The Min Max Database is for viewing only and cannot be saved to a disk file File Heter 10 Data His iliti S5uztem Help Select Figure 7 1 History Setup A total of fifteen history points may be accessed in the GridBoss At the District Regulator GridBoss the first nine history points are pre configured Refer to Table 7 1 CAUTION Do not alter the pre configured default history points 7 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Table 7 1 DR Default History Points History Definition Point Type Type of Point Archiving 1 Inner Loop Ambient Temperature Value APC 1 TMPVAL Average 2 Differential Pressure AIN A 1 EU Average 3 Inner Loop Regulator Input Pressure DRC 1
244. se trains square wave signals generated by measurement devices such as turbine meters The Pulse Input accepts digital level ON OFF signals from an external device and accumulates the changes over a configured period of time The PI can also determine a rate from the accumulated pulses over a configured period of time Refer to Figure 4 19 NOTE Pulse Inputs are not used in the GridBoss Gas Pressure Control System but are detailed here in case you desire to use PIs in a different type of application File Meter LI Mata Displ E His tary Utilities estem Help Pulse Inputs 1 of l Point Number A 5 Tao PL etit 1 EU Value 15 5 Units ACE YD Scan Period I Secs Lorversion 1 Aecum d Pulses Ere noii peer pins Pulses Today 14119144 Enabled Disabled loda loftal 2147191424 sob lod Enabled Yesterday s Total esac Current Rate ARG Hetive Alarms Hone Alar nay Advanced Fenturasy Cs Ma A E si Ma Eee a Figure 4 19 Pulse Inputs Screen Pulse input alarms when Enabled only occur when the pulse input is configured for Rate and not for Accumulate In accumulate the alarm code only reflects the occurrence of the pulse input configured in Manual Mode Point Number The Point Number indicates the location of the point such as rack and module number in the GridBoss The Point Number is automatically assigned by the GridBoss and cannot be edited Each pulse input has a unique Point Number to identify the inpu
245. serves the right without notice to alter or improve the designs or specifications of the products described herein i Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual FISHER Table of Contents For a more detailed listing see the Section Contents toward the front of each section Rev 9 99 iii GRIDLINK User Manual FISHER Table of Contents Continued iv Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual FISHER Table of Contents Continued Rev 08 99 v GRIDLINK User Manual Table of Contents Continued vi Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 1 GETTING STARTED 1 1 USER MANUAL OVERVIEW 1 1 1 Scope This manual describes how to use the GRIDLINK Configuration Software to configure and monitor the GB600 Series Controllers of a GridBoss Pressure Control and Management System such as the GB601 District Regulator DR Controller and the GB602 Low Pressure Point LPP Controller The GridBoss System controls the Setpoint at the District Regulator Controller through an actuator such as a Kixcel I P or servo valve The Setpoint is predicted by the historical profile of the District Regulator outlet pressure versus the time of day and temperature The LPP Controller monitors the average pressure for the minute at a low pressure point downstream from the District Regulator The average pressure for the minute and change in Setpoint for the regulator is relayed back to the DR Controller when the average pressure
246. splay Seventh Set Character Set A BcCoODE F GHdIdJsK CE WN OP QRS T UY WK Y 2 x Thou yr 8 6 N B Prev Set Next Seta Cancel A Figure 6 9 GridBoss Character Display Eighth Set 6 2 2 Creating a Display Example The following is an example for setting up a display that monitors Analog Inputs for specific points in a GridBoss 1 Select New Display from the GRIDLINK Display menu 2 Press the Character Set pushbutton 3 Press Next Set in the Character Set block to display the Character Set displayed in Figure 6 3 6 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 Place the cursor in the top left corner of the screen as in Figure 6 10 To place your cursor in the display position your mouse in the correct location and click File Meter 1 0 Data Displa Histor Utilities System Help fA BC DE F GA a c e b d f g h i j Ise Home ey to enter upper area n Figure 6 10 New Display Example 1 Type A Press Prev Set in the Character Set block to display the lower case alphabet letters Refer to Figure 6 2 or Figure 6 10 7 Place your cursor to the right of the A you typed previously and type nalog 10 Press Next Set in the Character Set block to display the upper case alphabet letters again 66 99 Place your cursor to the right of the g in Analog and type I Leave a space between the g and the I Refer to Figure 6 11 Press Prev Set in the
247. st save and close the currently selected display screen Character Set Show the character set currently selected for building the display Eight different character sets are supported two for upper and lower case alphabetical characters and six for various types of graphical characters Refer to Figure 6 2 through Figure 6 9 Press Next Set or Prev Set to select a character set ABCDEFGH HIJKLM MNO P a c e i j n o p bcdef gh k 1 m Figure 6 2 GridBoss Character Display First Set Character Set ABCDEFGH HIJKLH HNO P ABCDEFGH HIJKLHNO P RS T UV WKY 2 R T Y Q Q U VW x Figure 6 3 GridBoss Character Display Second Set Character Set Aaah ape Se sae a ee ee A ae ae bd f dard baits 7 tty tote ht rte b Prev Seti Next Sety Cancel 3 Figure 6 4 GridBoss Character Display Third Set D G HIJKL N 0 7 F ror 7 L i at J F Figure 6 5 GridBoss Character Display Fourth Set Rev 9 99 6 3 GRIDLINK User Manual K CM WN O P QR S T U Prey Seti Next Sety Cancel la Figure 6 6 GridBoss Character Display Fifth Set Character Set BCODEFGHTIJRKL 4H pas 1 A C Prey Seti Next Sety Cancel la Figure 6 7 GridBoss Character Display Sixth Set Character Set ABCDEFGH HIJKLHNOPORSTOUY WM XYZ t Y Rh f ai V Gta amp eR Prey Sety Next Sety Cancel 5 Figure 6 8 GridBoss Character Di
248. story Event Log exceptions include gt 18 19 19 19 1 2 7 14 diras 10 3 35 Unde Pa need a Disable Da sable C Disable Donen Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable HPE Disable APC Manual dioss Group Operator apt Old Value Hee Value rate 5 0 1 Enable Enable Enable Energized Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Hor mal alo Bosa Wistrict Log Description HIS41 fveraging Type HIS41L Archive Tyoe History Pi Input 1 fun Flog Alarma Howentary TOO Hode Status Alarma Alarm Clipping Temp Compare River eg ira Alora Mperotion Hode LPP communicating the change in Inner Loop Setpoint and Average Pressure for the minute Disk Configuration AI Calibration Initialization Sequence All Power Removed Initialized from Defaults Diagnostic Program Flash Memory New Clock FST Test Message in Event Log Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 7 8 ALARMS HISTORY Select History from the menu bar and then choose Alarms The Alarms History log option displays the Alarm Log The Alarm Log is used for recording when exceptional conditions occur from field inputs and calculations The Alarm Log contains the last 240 occurrences of alarms Refer to Section 7 7 for viewing other types of events You can use pushbuttons to change the time order of the log to save it to print it or to view it Use the Invert pushbutton to change the order of the log
249. t Each PI point must be individually configured The F4 Copy and F5 Paste can be used to save configuration time by allowing you to copy data from one configuration screen to another of the same type Refer to Section 4 7 Input and Output Point Numbers on page 4 32 Rev 9 99 4 25 GRIDLINK User Manual If there is more than one point of this type available in the GridBoss you can page to the other points by using the F2 Prev and F3 Next Pulse Inputs are associated with the following point numbers and physical locations A5 Sensor Module A6 Sensor Module B11 TO card B12 TO card Tag Enter up to 10 characters to identify the point being defined in this screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used EU Value The EU Value is dependent on how the EU Options are set in the PI Advanced Features dialog box The default value is 0 If the PI is set up for a Rate Max Rollover then the Current Rate is the EU Value If the PI is set up for an accumulator using Today s Total Max Rollover then Today s Total is the EU Value If the PI is set up for accumulator using Running Total Entered Rollover the EU Value corresponds to the accumulated pulses for the contract day times the Conversion The EU Value is compared to the value entered for the rollover maximum If it is greater than or equal to this entered value the EU Value here is reset to zero Refer to PI Advanced
250. t Data from the menu bar and then choose Soft Points Softpoints are storage areas for data or are used to pass configuration information to FSTs For example a softpoint may be used to store the results of a specified calculation by an FST or to store an intermediate result of a specified value acquired by an FST Softpoints consist of a Tag identifier one integer value and twenty floating values There are 16 softpoints are available Refer to Figure 5 4 Softpoint configuration is saved to programmable ROM when the Write to Internal Config Memory 1s activated from the GridBoss System Flag display File Meter 1 0 Data Displa Histor Utilities System Help Tag Soft Pt 1 Integer Flag Oj Data 11 Data 12 Data 13 Data 14 Data 15 Data 16 Data 17 Data 18 Data 19 Data 20 Figure 5 4 Softpoints Tag A 10 character identification name for the Softpoint Integer Flag A 16 bit unsigned integer value This value is typically used as a flag to denote the validity of the floating point data or as a counter The value is under control of an FST or user program Data 1 to 20 The data fields formatted for floating point data The values in the fields are under control of or used by FSTs and user programs For example an FST may write an intermediate result of a value it acquired and the Host program may poll the GridBoss for that information F1 Update Requests the most recent values from the GridBoss t
251. te to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags screen Rev 9 99 9 7 GRIDLINK User Manual When the Warm Start is complete the pushbutton automatically reverts to No Press FI Update to view the current status Cold Start In a Cold Start the GridBoss is initialized from the restart configuration saved in programmable ROM internal configuration memory or Flash memory If the configuration memory does not have a valid configuration written in it the factory defaults in ROM are used Use the Cold Start when a GridBoss is performing erratically the memory appears to be corrupted or when you desire to reset the unit to the last saved configuration The following paragraphs detail how the various GridBoss units react to a cold start Select the check box in the dialog box shown in Figure 9 6 to perform the desired Cold Start option CAUTION The Cold Start reloads all restart configuration data and may also clear logs displays and FSTs In addition it may cause output changes load new accumulator values and disable user program tasks and User Data Types Generally a Cold Start should not be used on a GridBoss that is actively gathering data and performing control Save or document all required data and parameter values that could be affected before performing the Cold Start Logs GridBoss displays and FSTs may be cleared by using the appropriate Cold Start option If a Write to Internal Config Mem which includes the FS
252. tem a parameter a pushbutton or a dialog box do the following Figure 10 1 Getting Started 10 2 1 Using Help One of the topics covered in the Getting Started dialog box is how to use the help system Both context sensitive and indexed help are explained see Sections 10 2 2 and 10 2 3 Help available from the menu structure such as the Getting Started menu item is obtained in the same way as other menu items 10 2 2 Context Sensitive Help To display context sensitive help on a menu item a parameter or a pushbutton do the following With the item parameter or pushbutton highlighted press F9 A help window dialog box appears on the screen as shown in Figure 10 2 If there are more lines of text than will fit in the help window you can use the Page Down and Page Up pushbuttons at the bottom of the help window 10 2 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Help Enter up to 10 characters as the name of the point being defined in this screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used Note that the Point Number indicates the location of this point in the GridBoss Page Downy Page Upy Index Figure 10 2 Example Context Sensitive Help Window 10 2 3 Index Help If you want to see a list of all help topics use the Index pushbutton In the resulting list select the desired topic either by clicking on the name with the mouse or by using the cursor keys to highlight the name and
253. th DRs screen is detailed in Section 3 In each DR the System gt Information screen is used to enter the Station name Address and Group of the DR Refer to Section 9 3 Information on page 9 3 The System gt Comm Ports gt Modem screen is used to enter the Host telephone number Connect Command Refer to Section 9 5 1 Modem on page 9 12 In each DR the Grid gt Comm with LPP screen is used to configure the LPP Tag name LPP Address and LPP Group of the LPP assigned to control this DR The Comm with LPP screen is detailed in Section 3 It is recommended that the DR and LPP configuration information along with the communications parameters such as Baud Rate be configured before the units are deployed in the field Each unit should be marked or labeled This allows further configuration from a central location The Sensor Module transducer calibrations should be recorded and if known should be configured It is also useful to synchronize the Date and Time in each unit Refer to New gt DR Configuration and New gt LPP Configuration in Section 2 9 20 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 9 7 1 Verifying Host Communications As each unit is installed in the field the communications with the Host and between the LPP and DRs should be verified by having the Host call the units Poll Region or Poll Units After an LPP and its assigned DRs are installed the Host can call the LPP Use the Force an Update pushbutton in the LPP screen to force the LPPs
254. that the battery can reach before generating a low battery alarm When the Low Battery Voltage Limit drops below the value entered in this field the control Mode shifts to Manual Mode and the Default Output value is used for the Kixcel position With or without alarms enabled this can cause the Mode to shift to Manual if the limit 1s violated The default value is 11 volts Outlet Press Point Fail Low Limit The lowest pressure that the Inner Loop Outlet Pressure can reach before generating an alarm When the Outlet Press Point Fail Low Limit drops below the value entered in this field the control Mode shifts to Manual Mode and the Default Output value is used for the Kixcel position With or without alarms enabled this can cause the Mode to shift to Manual if the limit is violated The default value is 0 Outlet Press Point Fail High Limit The highest pressure that the Inner Loop Outlet Pressure can reach before generating an alarm When the Outlet Press Point Fail High Limit exceeds the value entered in this field the control Mode shifts to Manual Mode and the Default Output value is used for the Kixcel position With or without alarms enabled this can cause the Mode to shift to Manual if the limit is violated The default value is 100 NOTE The Low Battery Voltage Limit AI point number El and the Outlet Press Point Fail Low and High Limits AI point number A2 can be set to send RBX alarms using the AI point Alarming options The al
255. the GridBoss is transmitting out of COM or the LOI port it can communicate to the PC using the PC COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 port The configuration of all communications ports is saved to programmable ROM when Write to Internal Config Memory is activated from the GridBoss Flags display After configuring the Comm Port select the F8 Save pushbutton to save the data to the GridBoss Other options include F4 Copy and F5 Paste functions to copy configuration from one communication port to another and F2 Prev and F3 Next functions to move between communication ports Use F1 Update to view saved changes Press F6 Cancel to cancel any changes you have made 9 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual File Grad 1 0 Data Display Histor Utilities System Help a 2af F dioss Coma Ports a Comm Tag Coma Coma Board Installed F ta Bit pl Bit i da ale ar ts parts ana Hat i iji ii I Disab Enon i iiien g idel d a Le It Enah tadi L Ve Key On Mel pa Hi Seca Valid Receive Cte A Key Off Delay 0 01 Secs Sols Hbg Fl ed y TF Falke eii HF EAE ee TERS au Enter a iE aia for this E Lins COMI Figure 9 7 GridBoss Comm Ports Screen Comm Tag A 10 character name for identification of the communications port located in the GridBoss Comm Board Comm ports only Indicates if a communications board is installed or not Baud Rate Transmit and receive data baud rate in bits per second The default value
256. the menu and then press Enter With a menu displayed you can highlight the desired item by using the Down Arrow and Up Arrow keys With the desired item highlighted press the Enter key to activate the function Instead of using the cursor keys and pressing Enter you can type the white letter of the menu item such as A for About If the menu item is followed by an ellipse for example Monitor a submenu appears You can then select an item from the submenu using the same methods as for the menu To leave a menu or submenu press the Esc key You can then select another menu You can also access another menu simply by using the Left Arrow and Right Arrow key The cursor movement keys are the four arrow keys which are designated as follows Up Arrow Down Arrow d Right Arrow gt Left Arrow The text scrolling keys are the Page Up and Page Down keys To use the keyboard in configuration screens and dialog boxes press the Tab key to move in a predetermined sequence from one parameter field or pushbutton to the next The field or pushbutton becomes highlighted to show you which one is selected Note that fields unavailable for changes are automatically skipped they are not highlighted When you Tab to the last field or pushbutton in the screen or dialog box pressing the Tab key again jumps back to the first field or pushbutton To go back to a previous field or pushbutton press the Shift and Tab keys toget
257. then pressing Enter Another way to bring up this list is by using a menu item as described in Section 10 4 Help Contents on page 10 4 The Help topics in the Index consist mainly of parameter names and menu options Note that some topic names have been abbreviated For example Analog Input functions appear with AT in front of the name such as in AI Alarms AI Scanning or AI Analog Inputs 10 3 KEYS Selecting the Keys item in the Help menu brings up the Help window shown in Figure 10 3 This Help window tells you that if you have a mouse or other pointing device such as a trackball it is usually easier to use it instead of the keyboard for getting around in the menus and screens However the keyboard can do everything that a mouse can The rest of the text in the Help window details how to use the keyboard For additional information on using the keyboard refer to Keyboard and Pointing Devices in Section 1 Rev 9 99 10 3 GRIDLINK User Manual If you have a mouse or other pointing device such as a trackball it is usually easier to use it instead of the keyboard for getting around in the menus and screens However the keyboard can do everything that a mouse can To use the keyboard to access the menus see the help on using the menus This typically involves the cursor movement defined below keys the ENTER key and the ESC key Figure 10 3 Help on Keys 10 4 HELP CONTENTS If you want to go
258. to alter a file or select Default to create a new communications file 4 Place your cursor in the Tag field and enter a new configuration name if necessary 5 Verify that the PC Baud Rate PC Comm Port and IRQ address match the values setup in your Personal Computer s Control Panel If they do not match alter the appropriate values in GRIDLINK Refer to Figure 2 4 and the parameter descriptions in section 2 4 6 Set the GridBoss Address to 240 when using the LOI port or the specific GridBoss Address of the remote GridBoss with which you desire to communicate 7 Set the GridBoss Group to 240 when using the LOI port or the specific GridBoss Group of the remote GridBoss with which you desire to communicate 8 Press the Advanced Features pushbutton Refer to Figure 2 5 9 Enter 10 in the Retires field 10 Enter 1 in the Timeout field 11 Press OK 12 Press F8 Save 13 Press Connect 2 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 2 5 NEW Use New in the File menu and select DR Configuration GB601 or LPP Configuration GB602 to set up a new configuration for a GridBoss that is not connected to GRIDLINK Available configuration parameters can be specified using the GRIDLINK software menu selections You configure the GridBoss configuration file as if you were connected to the device the main difference is that functions requiring a live connection such as Al Calibrations are unavailable in this mode When values are s
259. tputs used to turn equipment ON and OFF A Discrete Output can be configured in one of several different modes Latched Momentary Toggle TDO Timed Duration Output and TDO Toggle Refer to Figure 4 16 A pair of Discrete Outputs Timed Duration Output can be used to open and close the Kixcel File Heter 10 Data is j i Utilities System Help Point Number A Tay po Deflt 1 Status OM 5 Momen tary T Time Un 3 Secs atche me a Duration TOO isabled Active Alarma Hone mpa Farane ter sg Advanced Features ey EZ IPreuy F3 Mes ty F4 Copa FS Pas teg Fs Cancel haa Figure 4 16 Discrete Outputs In other installations a Discrete Output may be set to send a pulse to a specified device For a GridBoss installation the built in DO pulse is not used Point Number The Point Number indicates the location of the point such as rack and module number in the GridBoss The Point Number is automatically assigned by the GridBoss and cannot be edited The Point Number is automatically assigned by the GridBoss and cannot be edited Each discrete output has a unique Point Number to identify the input Each DO point must be individually configured The F4 Copy and F5 Paste can be used to save configuration time by allowing you to copy data from one configuration screen to another of the same type Refer to Section 4 7 Input and Output Point Numbers on page 4 32 If there is more than one point of this type available in the GridBoss yo
260. ts DR units and a Host computer system Both the LPP and DR units communicate with the Host Computer Communication can be originated by the Host computer or by the LPP DR units as an RBX Refer to Section 9 Configuring Report by Exception The LPP unit can communicate with up to five DR units Grid gt Comm with DRs Each DR contains information about the LPP that validates the communication Grid gt Comm with LPP In each LPP the System gt Information screen is used to enter the Station name Address and Group of the LPP Refer to Section 9 System Information The System gt Comm Ports gt Modem screen is used to enter the Host telephone number Connect Command Refer to Section 9 Modem In each LPP the Grid gt Comm with DRs is used to configure the DR Tag name DR Address DR Group and telephone number to the DR DR Connect Command Each DR must be individually configured Use the F2 Prev and F3 Next pushbuttons to view each DR configuration The Comm with DRs screen is detailed in Section 3 In each DR the System gt Information screen is used to enter the Station name Address and Group of the DR Refer to Section 9 System Information The System gt Comm Ports gt Modem screen is used to enter the Host telephone number Connect Command Refer to Section 9 Modem In each DR the Grid gt Comm with LPP screen is used to configure the LPP Tag name LPP Address and LPP Group of the LPP assigned to control this DR The Comm with LPP scre
261. typically for configuration software running on a PC LPM Lighting Protection Module Use this module to provide lightning and power surge protection for ROC FloBoss and GridBoss units that use I O M mA Milliamp s one thousandth of an ampere MCU Master Controller Unit MPU Micro processor Unit mW Milliwatts or 0 001 watt mV Millivolts or 0 001 volt N NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association O OH Off Hook modem communications signal Off line Accomplished while the target device is not connected by a communications link For example off line configuration is configuring a ROC a FloBoss or a GridBoss controller in a electronic file that is later loaded into the units Ohms Units of electrical resistance On line Accomplished while connected by a communications link to the target device For example on line configuration is configuring a ROC while connected to it so that current parameter values are viewed and new values can be loaded immediately OP Operator Port see LOI Rev 9 99 G 3 GRIDLINK User Manual Opcode Type of message protocol used by the ROC FloBoss or GridBoss controller to communicate with the ROCLINK GRIDLINK or GV101 software as well as host computers with ROC driver software P Q Parameter A property of a point that typically can be configured or set by the user For example the Poi
262. u can page to the other points by using the F2 Prev and F3 Next 4 20 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Discrete Outputs are located at the following Point Numbers and their locations are Point Number A4 Main card Point Number B5 I O card Point Number B6 I O card Tag Enter up to 10 characters as the name to identify the point being defined in this screen Any alphanumeric characters including spaces may be used Status The Status field is both an indicator and a control As an indicator it shows the state of the discrete output OFF normally indicates that the output is OFF or that a switch is open ON normally indicates that the output is ON or that a switch is closed When Scanning is Disabled Manual Mode and in the OFF state the Status can be changed by pressing the pushbutton and setting Status to ON The default value is OFF Momentary The pushbutton next to the Momentary field is both an indicator and a control When set to ON the discrete output regardless of its configured DO Type is placed into the Momentary mode This is sometimes called one shot Immediately after the ON setting is saved using F8 Save the discrete output is activated for the amount of time defined in the Time On parameter The Momentary pushbutton automatically resets to OFF DOUT Type The four options let you select how you want this discrete output to function Latched Select Latched if you
263. ual 6 2 2 1 Adding Live Data to a Display The following is an example of adding live data to a display taken from a GridBoss Refer to Figure 6 12 1 Place your cursor to the right of the g in Point Tag 2 Press the Shift and keys at the same time on the keyboard The value description window displays Refer to Figure 6 14 1 nde Fined it Point Too Td 1 Discrete Inputs Units iscrete Dutputs Scan Period nalog Inputs Filter nalog Uutputs Pulse Inputs A a el a SE ae a ee a mmm AA al i ina ili ae oe ee oe oe oo ROC Real Time Clock L WE Comm Poris H High Reading EU Eustem Variables w Lom Hlarm EU 4 Jo td A D i G Figure 6 14 Value Description Window 3 Select Analog Inputs AIN A 1 and Point Tag Id and press OK 4 Press No when the Change Data Verification dialog appears as in Figure 6 15 Selecting Yes in the Change Data Verification dialog allows users to manually change values while using the custom display Do you allow user to change data al a Figure 6 15 Change Data Verification Dialog 6 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 5 Place your cursor next to the Hi EU Low EU Filtered EUs and Alarm fields and enter live values for each of these fields pressing Shift and at the same time Refer to Figure 6 16 The live readings to select from the point type value description window Figure 6 14 include Point Tag Point Tag Id Hi EU
264. ual Control Type Manual Inner Loop Outer Loop and Adaptive Mode use two bits to display the current Mode of the Control Type Profile Locked An 8 bit field for informational purposes only If the last bit far right 1s set to 1 the time of day profile is not locked and can actively alter the time of day load profile If the last bit far right is set to O the time of day profile is locked and can NOT actively alter the time of day load profile Rev 9 99 6 19 GRIDLINK User Manual File Grid 10 ata Display History Low Press Control Paint gla Td i mbr Setpoint Low Frese Pero Low Press Figure 6 28 Low Pressure Point Inner Control Loop Monitor 6 20 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SECTION 7 THE HISTORY MENU 7 1 SCOPE This section describes how to configure the GridBoss history and view the various logs This section contains the following information Information Section Page Number History Setup 7 2 7 1 Min Max Histor 7 3 7 E c et O T pn e m O Jo sz E pu jjs i ea 15 Minute 7 5 7 10 Day Histor 7 6 7 11 Events Histor 7 7 7 1 Alarms Histor 7 8 7 1 7 2 HISTORY SETUP Select History and choose Setup A screen appears as shown in Figure 7 1 The History Setup option allows data values and calculated variables stored in the current value database to be copied and stored for up to a month in the historical database The historical databa
265. unidentified table field displays which table you are viewing Min Max History Minute History Hourly History Daily History Alarm Log or Event Log GridBoss Address The GridBoss Address of the GridBoss being polled The GridBoss Address is setup in the System Information screen GridBoss Group The GridBoss Group of the GridBoss being polled The GridBoss Group is setup in the System Information screen Type The Type of GridBoss District Regulator DR or Low Pressure Point LPP Time Downloaded The date and time the history file was created Rev 9 99 7 7 GRIDLINK User Manual Operator The Operator currently logged on to GRIDLINK The Operator ID is setup in the GRIDLINK Security screen Log The first number displays what log in the series you are viewing The second number displays how many logs are available in the series The last number if present displays how many total logs are in the file 7 3 2 Displaying History Points Use the Select New pushbutton to display history points Note that some history points with certain Archive Types such as Accumulate do not have useful Min Max values Refer to Figure 7 4 Select History to Sho nner Loop AERROR nner Loop SETPT Figure 7 4 Select New DR Default Example By default all history points are selected Click the check box to deselect any points you do not want to display To reselect a point just click on its check box aga
266. ure 9 9 RBX Features ooooocnocconocononncnonccnnnonanns 9 14 Figure 9 10 Configuring the Basic Communication Parameters its cs 9 17 Figure 9 11 Configuring the RBX Communication ParametelS tildes 9 18 Figure 9 12 Enabling Alarming 9 18 Figure 9 13 Establishing RBX Alarming 9 19 Figure 10 1 Getting Started oooonnconnnnnnnnccnnnnonco 10 2 Figure 10 2 Example Context Sensitive Help WANdOW ioeie nr Mined hae ete eto 10 3 Figure 10 3 Help on Keys 10 4 Figure 10 4 Help Contents oooooccnnccnoncnonnccnnnnonnss 10 4 Figure 10 5 About Dialog BOX uu eee 10 5 Figure A 1 Discrete Output Dialog A 1 Figure A 2 Timed Duration Output A 2 Figure A 3 TDO Parameters cccococonccnoncnonnnonnccnnnos A 5 Pile Extensions tii ci cia sica nl 2 12 MA A ateesatpspecedegtes 2 1 Collect GridBoss Data oooocnnnccnnnnccnonncnonccnonaconnnos 2 14 NA eonen eeto tet eea eiO Eaa Eain 2 27 Dir ct Connects 510 25 Seti Se eget tee Sh 2 3 Downloads estonia Sateen ett Settee det 2 20 A E 2 30 GridBoss DirectolY ooooconooccnonccnonnconnanonanccnanccnonacos 2 4 GRIDLINK Security ccoocccooccconcncnonncnnnccnonacconacinnnos 2 30 NA A EN 2 11 OPO Ms volcan Dep ocn E AEE E 2 12 Print ConfiguratiOM oooccnccnonccnonononnc nnonanancnnnancnnnne 2 29 Update FirmMWal6 ooococccnonnnonncnonccconacancnnonanonnnacnnne 2 23 Update Hardware ieii ioina i iaa oi 2 25 STETTEN E E E E EERS 1 6 G 2 Updates E
267. uts to the GridBoss Controller for the pressure calculation Soft Points A type of ROC FloBoss or GridBoss point with generic parameters that can be configured to hold data as desired by the user G 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual SP Setpoint or Static Pressure SPI Slow Pulse Input SRAM Static Random Access Memory Stores data as long as power is applied typically backed up by a lithium battery or supercapacitor T Z TDO Timed Discrete Output or Timed Duration Output TLP Type of point Logical or point number and Parameter number TXD Transmitted Data communications signal Rev 9 99 G 5 GRIDLINK User Manual This page intentionally left blank G 6 Rev 9 99 TOPICAL INDEX GRIDLINK User Manual Symbols EU ola 1 10 GEO rey A NIN 1 10 DEER A E e ere AIR TE ep 1 10 CE Coby O enue 1 10 A A IRENE IRA 1 11 QA exebovevevanedaeseesetss 1 11 CESS E O A O 1 11 File Extensions TI O RA 2 19 BIN ee aa a e o ee dn 2 24 DAY a de os 2 12 2 27 A EREE Ais Ih ale as Boney les 2 4 TSP eek s atin tea td Le oe 6 2 6 12 BAYA Bees EAEE EAEE EENE 2 12 2 19 COE E A 2 12 E E OREA AAE EET EEEN ERE Eve CARR Byline 2 11 MOB a a ERE 2 12 2 27 POB erae da ta tad a Ag 2 12 2 27 PRN pastas La dol doce da ale id eo da di 2 16 TOD dis 2 15 2 16 2 22 Numbers OF Counts tinea Ce eee es 4 23 A 2 100 Coumt ma a TE EOD A OL be 4 23 A 2 15 Minute History File oononccinnco
268. utton to immediately send the entire log to a connected on line printer The log prints out approximately 50 entries to a page for a total of five pages The Next Block and Prev Block pushbuttons are used to move between blocks of events Each block may contain up to 30 event lines If there are more than 15 event lines in the currently selected block you can use the scroll bar on the side of the list to view the rest of the events in the block The scroll bar only works for the currently selected block of events you cannot scroll between blocks of events The Event Log has information fields that describe the point type parameter number time and date the parameter changed value the type of event description of the event logical point number the operator log on identification the old value the new value or a 14 character detailed string The Event Log is only cleared when Restore config and clear alarm event logs is selected in the Cold Start Options dialog and a Cold Start is performed No event is logged if there is no change to the parameter value There are several types of events possible other than a parameter for a point type being changed These events are listed after Figure 7 8 Refer to Figure 7 8 for a sample display Rev 9 99 7 13 GRIDLINK User Manual vent ag Tridloss Time Downloaded 3 18 99 Time Type HST wl HST m HST m1 FET ul PIN 611 Hi 03 18 9949 44 158 99 09 Figure 7 8 Event Log Hi
269. uttons at the bottom of the screen to view other history points save the log or print it Use the Select New pushbutton to display history points other than the first six Use the Save pushbutton to store the entire log in a disk file that you specify Use the mdb extension when naming the log file This file can be viewed or printed later using the Open option in the File menu Use the Print pushbutton to immediately send the entire log to a connected on line printer The log prints out up to five history points to a page Rev 9 99 7 9 GRIDLINK User Manual 7 5 15 MINUTE Select History from the menu bar and then choose 15 Minute The 15 Minute History sometimes called historical or periodical database option displays the values for history points other than FST controlled logged in the GridBoss at 15 minute intervals for the past 35 days The 15 Minute log contains up to 840 entries and is archived every 15 minutes at the latest The values always display with the most recent value first The time stamp for periodic logging consists of the month day hour and minute The exception is for FST Second logging in which the time stamp consists of the day hour minute and second The District Regulator parameters include ambient temperature regulator inlet pressure regulator outlet pressure output signal to the Kixcel Kixcel position and battery voltage once a second The LPP parameters include the low pressure point valu
270. ve Reading 24 Figure 4 8 Al Set Midpoint 1 10 If desired calibrate Midpoint 2 such as 50 of range for the Analog Input Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units and press the Set Mid 2 pushbutton Refer to Figure 4 9 Otherwise use the Done pushbutton and proceed to Step 12 Rev 9 99 4 9 GRIDLINK User Manual Set Midpoint 2 Point Analog input Dead Weight Tester Value Live Reading 51 Figure 4 9 AI Set Midpoint 2 11 If desired calibrate Midpoint 3 such as 75 of range for the Analog Input Enter the Dead Weight Tester Value in engineering units and press the Set Mid 3 pushbutton Refer to Figure 4 10 Otherwise use the Done pushbutton and proceed to Step 12 Set Midpoint 3 Point Analog input Dead Weight Tester Value Live Reading TT Figure 4 10 AI Set Midpoint 3 12 Press the Done pushbutton to close the main calibration window Figure 4 4 and unfreeze the associated input 4 10 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 4 3 AO ANALOG OUTPUT Select 1 O from the menu bar and then choose AO Analog outputs are analog signals generated by the GridBoss to regulate equipment such as control valves or any device requiring proportional control Refer to Figure 4 11 An Analog Output can be used to adjust the Setpoint at the Kixcel When an Analog Output AO is used to send the Setpoint to the Kixcel an Analog Input Al may be used to communicate the position of the Kixcel t
271. ve not yet been assigned try using the default Level 1 identifier of AAA with a Password of 1000 or the default Level 6 identifier of APC with a Password of 1234 Identifiers are assigned by using the security features of the GRIDLINK software as explained in Section 8 Initially you may access GRIDLINK and the GridBoss as the Administrator using the default the values Operator ID APC Password 1234 2 Type your assigned 4 digit Password and press Enter For added security the software displays an asterisk for each number that you type If passwords have not yet been assigned try using the default password of 1234 GRIDLINK compares the entered identifier and password to a list of valid ones If the entries are valid further access to the software is allowed beginning with the initial menu bar File and Help menus only If the log on is not valid the following message displays The ID or Password is not correct please ENTER to try again 1 28 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual Press Enter and repeat steps 1 and 2 You can repeat the procedure as many times as needed until you successfully enter a valid Operator ID and Password If you want to exit from the log on screen press Esc This aborts the GRIDLINK software and returns you to the point where you started GRIDLINK If security is enabled for the port being used by GRIDLINK to communicate with the GridBoss such as the local operator interface port
272. xception message generates Note that RBX alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured Select Disabled if you do not want RBX alarming to be active for this point RBX on LPP Alarms Select Disabled or Enabled to allow Report by Exception RBX alarming when the Low Battery or Pressure Point Fail type of LPP alarm occurs By default RBX on LPP Alarms is Disabled After configuring a DR and pressing F8 Save use Write to Internal Config Memory in the GridBoss Flags display This saves the configuration to programmable ROM in case you must perform a Cold Start Refer to Section 9 3 4 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 2 REGULATOR CONTROL When using a District Regulator Controller select Regulator Control under the Grid menu to display the screen that is used to setup the Inner Loop tune the control loop and establish necessary adaptive configuration parameters for Adaptive Predictive Control Tag Inner Loop Qutput Type Analog 5 Outlet Pressure Setpoint Control utput Dutput Feedback Change in Dutpat 0 0000dA Loop Period 5 Secs Cale Time 8 0000000 Secs Active Alarms Hone Ambient Temp Fail REX Alara Options ILO Defini tiong uninig Adaptive F Cancel PE Save Figure 3 3 Comm with LPP Regulator Control Tag Name of the Inner Control Loop you are configuring Enter up to 10 characters to identify the control loop point being defined in this screen Any alpha
273. xception message to the Host On Alarm Clear When the DR Output Monitor leaves an alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Set Clear In either condition a Report by Exception message generates Note that RBX alarming also requires the communications port to be properly configured Select Disabled if you do not want RBX alarming to be active for this point 3 2 2 I O Definitions Use the I O Definitions pushbutton to select the type of input or output I O desired for the control loop 3 8 Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 10 Definition Qutlet Pressure RIK A 2 EU il Ai mos 5 Enabled nable Temperature ALL AS l boto A a Point Ok A Cancel A Figure 3 5 I O Definition for Analog Output 1 0 Definition Outlet Pressure A al Tenperature TENERTE A 3 EU Prato DO Open Point an te Point DO Close Point E ll Ea Figure 3 6 I O Point Definition for Discrete Output Click the I O Definitions pushbuttons to select the point type for the option Refer to Figure 3 7 11 Filtered EUs Soft Points AIN Mmmmonuro DDD Figure 3 7 I O Point Definition Example for Analog Inputs To use the point definition dialog box first determine the point type to use as an input or output by highlighting it in the left most scrollable list Rev 9 99 3 9 GRIDLINK User Manual Next in the middle scrollable list select the exact point type location
274. ximum Limit Setpoint or Control Output at maximum limit Minimum Limit Setpoint or Control Output at minimum limit Active LPP Alarms This field indicates any alarms that are active from the LPP Controller When alarming is Enabled the limit alarms that are active appear Even if the Alarms field is Disabled all alarm indicators can still appear You may see the following None No active alarms Low Bat Low battery alarm Pressure Xmit Low pressure transmitter point failure 4 Comm Fail Communications failure Rev 9 99 3 3 GRIDLINK User Manual 3 1 1 RBX Alarm Options Communications with the LPP can be tracked by the Host by sending a Report by Exception alarm to the Host when a set of conditions is met RBS Alara Options oo LPP Comm Alara isabled_ _ Me q i in pad ihe o seri On Alara Clear CH On Alarm Set E Clear Cancel A Figure 3 2 RBX Alarm Options RBX on LPP Comm Alarm Set the appropriate type of Report by Exception RBX alarm Disabled Select Disabled to turn this option OFF This is the default value On Alarm Set When the LPP enters a communications alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Clear When the LPP leaves a communications alarm condition the GridBoss generates a Report by Exception message to the Host On Alarm Set Clear In either condition a Report by E
275. y using Next Set and Prev Set buttons Refer to Figure 6 26 nots Point T 1 1d P Fey Elja a F AIE mi LS Value in Ells m com Value a flare Code GR MIA Low Alarm Low Low Alare Current Hate High Alara Today s lotal E Yesterday otal H Rata Alarm High High Alarms Alara Code B EB H H H Hanual Moda r i E H a a Figure 6 26 Monitor Pulse Input Alarm Code An 8 bit field for informational purposes only If a bit is set to 1 the alarm is active If a bit is set to 0 the alarm is cleared Rev 9 99 GRIDLINK User Manual 6 3 6 Control Loop The monitor display for Control Loops shows a different display depending on the type of GridBoss that you are viewing Refer to Figure 6 27 and Figure 6 28 Il Point Tag Id Xie L Control Tye TIO Selpoin Outlet Press it Change in Uwlput H Control Untpat 1H Output Feedback 24 616258 Profile Locked PUQIaBad Predicted Hdaptive Value i Current Time of Day Value it Control Type Profile Locked AAA A aganna Disable l E H A Hanisal y Locked Tracking ET 24 1 Inner Loop Output Feedback Control 1 8 Outer Loop Stop on Reset 1 1 Adoptive Cds Figure 6 27 District Regulator Outer Control Loop Monitor Control Type An 8 bit field for informational purposes only If a bit is set to 1 the Control Type is active If a bit is set to 0 the Control Type is not active Note that the act

GridLink Configuration Software for the GridBoss System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents